JP2019170551A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To simplify processing for executing a performance.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 1 is configured so that, each record included in an upper limit value selection table corresponding to a time shortening continuation judge performance includes an effective region and an invalid region. Based on the information stored in the effective region, a performance content of the time shortening continuation judge performance is controlled. According to the control, a capacity of the invalid region is adjusted, therefore, a capacity of the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the time shortening continuation judge performance can be made to match a capacity of the upper limit value selection table corresponding to a button notice performance with a large number of performance sections, compared with the time shortening continuation judge performance. Therefore, about the time shortening continuation judge performance and button notice performance, each kind of processing can be made common, so that, processing for executing a performance can be simplified.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which an effect is executed in response to an operation of an operation means.

Conventionally, a gaming machine in which an effect is executed in response to detection of an operation of an operating means is known (see Patent Document 1).
In this gaming machine, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, one threshold value is selected from a plurality of threshold values. Then, in accordance with the fact that the number of operations of the effect switch detected during the operation effective period has reached the selected threshold value, the effect of notifying the provision of the probability variation state is executed.

JP 2011-31114 A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the process for executing the effect becomes complicated.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of effects having different contents are defined as effects using the operation means, the processing cannot be shared for the plurality of effects, and the processing is complicated. There is a risk of becoming.
The subject of this invention is simplifying the process for performing an effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the first invention is stored in the storage area corresponding to the specific effect in response to the operation means being operated during the setting of the valid period corresponding to the specific effect. Based on the information that is selected, it includes an effect control means for selecting an operation effect mode and executing an operation effect according to the selected mode, and the storage area corresponding to the specific effect includes an effective area and an invalid area. In other words, the effect control means selects the mode of the operation effect based on the information stored in the effective area.
In the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the invention, the storage area corresponding to the specific effect includes a valid area and an invalid area. Then, the mode of the operation effect is selected based on the information stored in the effective area, and the mode of the operation effect is not selected based on the information stored in the invalid area.
Thus, when a plurality of specific effects are defined and a storage area corresponding to each specific effect is provided, the capacity of the invalid area included in the storage area corresponding to each specific effect is adjusted. The capacity of the storage area can be made the same for all the specific effects. Therefore, for all the specific effects, a process for defining a storage area (specifically, a process for setting table information described later), and a process for selecting an operation effect mode based on the information stored in the storage area ( Specifically, various processes such as an addition value selection process described later can be shared.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the first invention, it is possible to simplify the process for executing the specific effect.
Here, as the specific effect, a short-time continuous judge effect or a chance-up effect, which will be described later, corresponds. The effective period corresponds to an operation effective period described later. The operation means corresponds to an effect button 5b described later. The storage area corresponds to an upper limit value selection table (or each record included in the upper limit value selection table) described later. The information corresponds to a counter upper limit value described later. An effect control circuit 300 to be described later corresponds to the effect control means.

The gaming machine according to the second invention is the gaming machine according to the first invention, wherein the effective area includes a plurality of storage units, and the effect control means is setting the effective period among the plurality of storage units The mode of the operation effect is selected based on the information stored in the storage unit corresponding to the time when the operation means is operated.
According to the gaming machine according to the second invention, it is possible to select the mode of the operation effect according to the time when the operation means is operated during the setting of the effective period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the effect Become.
Here, a field described later corresponds to the storage unit.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect of the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect of the invention includes a first specific effect and a second specific effect as specific effects, and a memory corresponding to the first specific effect. The capacity of the area and the capacity of the storage area corresponding to the second specific effect are the same, the capacity of the effective area included in the storage area corresponding to the first specific effect, and the storage area corresponding to the second specific effect The effective area included is different in capacity.
According to the gaming machine according to the third invention, it is possible to simplify the process for executing the specific effect while diversifying the specific effect.
Here, as the first specific effect, a short-time continuous judge effect described later corresponds. The second specific effect corresponds to a chance-up effect described later.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to simplify a process for executing an effect.

It is a perspective view which shows the whole structure of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the front of a game board and showed typically the part required for description. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. 3 is an address map of a memory area used by a CPU 210. It is a flowchart which shows CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows a main loop process. It is a flowchart which shows the evacuation process at the time of a power supply interruption. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value management process. It is a flowchart which shows switch management processing. It is a flowchart which shows a usual start ball | bowl detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a special game management process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric role opening / closing switching process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening release control process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening closing effective process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening release end wait process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal game management process. It is a flowchart which shows a usual figure change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a usual figure stop. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric role opening / closing switching process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release control process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory closing effective process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release completion | finish weight process. It is a flowchart which shows a performance display apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a base ratio calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows a sub timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows a stop command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows an addition value selection process. It is a figure which shows the structure of the upper-limit-value selection table corresponding to a time continuation judgment effect. It is a figure which shows the structure of the upper limit selection table corresponding to a chance up effect. It is a figure which shows the structure of the upper limit selection table corresponding to a button notice effect.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of the pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, an integrated door unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, the inner frame unit 3, and the integrated door unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. Thereby, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2. The integrated door unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.
The outer frame unit 2 includes a rectangular frame (outer frame). And the outer frame with which the outer frame unit 2 is provided is fixed with respect to the island facility of a game arcade.
The inner frame unit 3 includes a rectangular frame (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is disposed inside the outer frame unit 2.
The integrated door unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape. The door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a disposed substantially at the center, a decorative portion 4b disposed around the transparent plate 4a, a tray unit 5 disposed below the transparent plate 4a, and a tray. And a firing handle 6 disposed on the side of the unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape using a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is formed of a transparent or translucent resin material, and has a shape that bulges forward. Each corner on the upper side of the decorative portion 4b is provided with a sound extraction portion 4c in which a sound generator (speaker) 22 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. Each sound extraction part 4c is provided with a plurality of sound extraction holes through which the sound output from the sound generator 22 passes. In addition, a plurality of frame lamps 20 (see FIG. 3) are disposed in the decorative portion 4b. Each frame lamp 20 includes a light emitting element (LED) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The tray unit 5 includes a tray 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls), and an effect button 5b and a rotary selector 5c disposed on the front side of the tray 5a.
The effect button 5b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and is disposed so as to protrude upward from the tray unit 5. The effect button 5b can be pressed by the player (pressed downward). Inside the saucer unit 5, a first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a pressing operation of the effect button 5b is disposed. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 (see FIG. 3) every time the effect button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called “jog dial”) is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and is disposed so as to surround the effect button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated by a player (operation to rotate about a cylindrical axis). Inside the tray unit 5, a second operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c is disposed. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 every time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 [°]).

A lending operation unit 7 is disposed on the upper surface of the tray unit 5. The lending operation unit 7 includes a ball lending button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit 500 (see FIG. 3) capable of reading and updating information recorded on the prepaid card. When a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 500, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 500 is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated in a state where the prepaid card is inserted into the CR unit 500, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the tray 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of paid-out game balls, and the updated remaining frequency of the valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the return button 7 b is operated in a state where the prepaid card having the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit 500, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 500.
Here, the prepaid cart corresponds to, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, or the like.
The firing handle 6 can be rotated by the player. Inside the firing handle 6, a firing volume (not shown) for detecting the angle at which the firing handle 6 is rotated is disposed. The firing volume outputs a detection signal corresponding to the detected angle to the payout control circuit 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of the game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a front side of the game board and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inner side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. Thus, the game board unit 10 is arranged on the back side of the integrated door unit 4. Then, the player can visually recognize a game board 11 (game area 30) to be described later via the transparent plate 4a. In the present embodiment, a game area 30 described later is formed between the back surface of the transparent plate 4 a and the front surface of the game board 11.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various effect devices (main image display device 31, sub) attached to the set board. Image display device 32).
The set plate is formed in a box shape whose front side is open. An opening made of a through-hole is provided at a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board. The game board 11 is formed in a flat plate shape with resin. An opening (not shown) made up of a through hole is provided at a substantially central portion of the game board 11. Then, the player can view the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set board.
Around the opening in the front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which game balls launched according to the rotation operation of the launch handle 6 flow down. The game area 30 includes a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 as paths through which the game balls flow down. Yes.
Further, a plurality of board surface lamps 21 (see FIG. 3) are disposed in the game area 30 of the game board 11. Each panel lamp 21 includes a light emitting element (LED) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 includes a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display. The main image display device 31 has a display screen 31a capable of displaying effect images.
On the display screen 31a, three first effect symbols display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) in which a first effect symbol z1 (not shown) is displayed and a second effect symbol z2 (not shown) are displayed. It is possible to configure one second effect symbol display area a4 (not shown).
The 1st production design z1 is constituted including identification information (symbol), such as a number, a character, a symbol, and a character. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform change display and stop display of the first effect symbol z1. The second effect design z2 is composed of color bars. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform change display and stop display of the second effect symbol z2.
The variation display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that the first effect symbol z1 is moved (scrolled) in the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and is displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. 2 A display in which the type of effect design z2 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is sequentially changed).
The stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that one kind of the first effect symbol z1 is stopped at the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect symbol display area a4. 1, a display in which one type of second effect design z2 is displayed (a color bar represents a predetermined color).
A special symbol is obtained by combining the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and the second effect symbol z2 that is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. The result of the lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is displayed.
The display screen 31a can be configured with reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) in which a reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed.
In the holding symbol display area b1, a holding symbol h corresponding to the start information in the notification display (special symbol variation display and stop display) is displayed. In the hold symbol display area b2, a hold symbol h corresponding to the start information for which the notification display is held is displayed.

The sub image display device 32 is disposed at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31.
The sub image display device 32 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT display. The sub image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying an effect image.
The sub image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including an origin position (see FIG. 2) and an effect position (not shown) below the origin position. Yes.
The sub image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the origin position is arranged above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the effect position is arranged on the front side of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31, and covers a part of the display screen 31a.

A first start port 51 is provided below the display screen 31 a in the game area 30. The first start port 51 is a ball entrance that opens upward (so-called “nose”), and game balls can always be entered. The first start port 51 is capable of entering a game ball that flows down the left path (cannot enter a game ball that flows down the right path).
A special FIG. 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the first start port 51. The special FIG. 1 start port switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the first start port 51 (the game ball has entered the first start port 51). Output. The main control circuit 200 executes the first special symbol lottery in response to the detection signal input from the special figure 1 start port switch 101.
On the left side of the first starting port 51 in the game area 30, an upper left other winning port 55, a left middle other winning port 56, and a lower left other winning port 57 are provided. Each of the other winning holes 55 to 57 is a ball opening that opens upward, and game balls can always be entered. Each of the other winning prize openings 55 to 57 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
The game board 11 is provided with a left prize opening switch 106 (see FIG. 3). The left winning port switch 106 is a game ball that has entered the upper left other winning port 55 (game ball entering the upper left other winning port 55), and a game ball that has entered the left middle other winning port 56 (other left left winning items). In response to the detection of a game ball that has entered the lower left other winning port 57 (the game ball has entered the lower left other winning port 57). 200 is output. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the prize ball in response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning port switch 106.

A start gate 41 is provided on the right side of the display screen 31 a in the game area 30. The start gate 41 is formed so that it can always be passed by a game ball. The start gate 41 is capable of passing a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot pass a game ball flowing down the left path).
The start gate 41 is provided with a gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3). The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passing of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control circuit 200 executes the normal symbol lottery in response to the detection signal input from the gate switch 104.
Below the start gate 41 in the game area 30, a big prize opening 53 is provided. The grand prize opening 53 is displaced between a closed state in which gaming balls cannot enter the grand prize opening 53 and an open state in which gaming balls can enter the grand prize opening 53. A special electric combination (special electric combination) 53a (so-called “attacker”) is provided.
The special electric accessory 53a is opened and closed by a special prize opening solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). The special winning opening 53 is normally closed with the special electric accessory 53a closed, so that it is impossible to enter a game ball, but the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won. Thus, when the big hit gaming state occurs, the special electric accessory 53a is opened, and the game ball can be entered. The big prize opening 53 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the big prize opening 53. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 53 (a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 53). The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to an input of a detection signal from the count switch 103.

A second start port 52 is provided below the special winning port 53 in the game area 30. The second start port 52 includes a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the second start port 52 and an open state in which a game ball can enter the second start port 52. An ordinary electric combination (ordinary electric combination) 52a (so-called “electric tulip”) that can be displaced is provided.
The ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). The second starting port 52 is normally closed with the ordinary electric accessory 52a closed, so that it is impossible to enter a game ball. However, when the normal symbol lottery is won, 52a is opened, and a game ball can be entered. The second starting port 52 can enter a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
In the second start port 52, a special FIG. 2 start port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. The special figure 2 start port switch 102 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the second start port 52 (the game ball has entered the second start port 52). Output. The main control circuit 200 executes the second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102.
A right other winning port 54 is provided below the second starting port 52 in the game area 30. The other right winning port 54 is a ball opening that opens upward, and a game ball can be always entered. The right other winning port 54 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
In the other right winning opening 54, a right winning opening switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The right winning port switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the right other winning port 54 (a game ball that has entered the right other winning port 54). . The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the prize ball in response to the input of the detection signal from the right prize opening switch 105.

In the lowermost position in the game area 30, an out port 58 is provided for discharging game balls that have not entered (winned) any of the winning ports 51-57.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which the game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3. The pachinko machine 1 is configured so that all game balls launched into the game area 30 (all game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. In other words, the game ball launched into the game area 30 is discharged from the game area 30 by entering any of the winning holes 51 to 57 or passing through the out port 58 and flows into the discharge path. To do.
Specifically, the game balls that have entered the winning holes 51 to 57 are detected by the switches 101 to 103, 106, and 106 disposed in the winning holes and then guided to the discharge path. In addition, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
The inner frame unit 3 is provided with an out switch 109 (see FIG. 3). The out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Further, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged in the game area 30 so as to guide the game balls to the winning ports 51 to 57 and the start gate 41.

A main display 60 is disposed on the game board 11. The main display 60 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured by a light emitting element (in the present embodiment, an LED).
Information related to the game is displayed on the main display 60. That is, the main display 60 includes a special figure 1 display apparatus, a special figure 2 display apparatus, a universal figure display apparatus, and a status display apparatus.
Specifically, the main display 60 includes 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32). And in the main display 60, LED1-LED8 becomes a special figure 1 display apparatus, LED7-LED16 becomes a special figure 2 display apparatus, LED17-LED24 becomes a common figure display apparatus, and LED25-LED32 shows a status display. It is a device.
The special figure 1 display device can perform change display and stop display of the first special symbol made up of numbers, symbols and the like. And in the special figure 1 display apparatus, the result of the 1st special symbol lottery is displayed by the 1st special symbol stopped and displayed.
The special figure 2 display device can perform change display and stop display of the second special symbol made up of numbers, symbols and the like. And in the special figure 2 display apparatus, the result of the 2nd special symbol lottery is displayed by the 2nd special symbol stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the special symbol display device and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4 are the time when the variable display is started. The time when the stop display is started and the lottery result indicated by the stopped and displayed symbols are associated with each other.
Then, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), or the second special symbol (stopped on the special figure 2 display device) When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (a jackpot symbol), a jackpot gaming state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.
The general-purpose display device can perform a change display and a stop display of normal symbols made up of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, the normal symbol display device displays the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the stopped normal symbol. Then, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the general diagram display device becomes a specific symbol (per symbol per symbol), a game state per symbol which is a game state advantageous to the player is generated.
In the status display device, the number of times the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is suspended (special figure 1 number of suspensions), the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is suspended (special figure 2) Number of holds), the number of times the display of the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is held (ordinary number of holds), the type of jackpot gaming state (number of round games executed), instructions for launching game balls to the right path, etc. Is displayed.

The pachinko machine 1 is provided with detection sensors that detect various abnormal states.
In the present embodiment, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are provided as detection sensors.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3. The glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal (glass frame opening signal) to the main control circuit 200 via the dispensing control board e3 in response to the opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3. To do.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. The inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal (inner frame opening signal) to the main control circuit 200 via the payout control board e3 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. To do.
The vibration detection sensor 113 detects the vibration of the game board 11. In the present embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is disposed on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal (board surface vibration detection sensor signal) to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of vibration of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11. In the present embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are arranged on the game board 11. Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal (panel radio wave detection sensor signal 1, panel radio wave detection sensor signal 2) to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the radio wave.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11. In the present embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is disposed in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). In the game board 11, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 disposed in the inner frame unit 3 sends a detection signal (out-port magnetic detection sensor signal) to the main control circuit 200 via the payout control board e3 in response to the detection of magnetism. Send to. In addition, each magnetic detection sensor 115 disposed on the game board 11 sends a detection signal (panel magnetic detection sensor signal 1, panel magnetic detection sensor signal 2) to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of magnetism. To send.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210.
The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board e1, a sub control board e2, a payout control board e3, an inner frame board e4, an external terminal board e5, a connection board e6, a panel board e7, and the like as circuit boards.
The main control board e1, the sub control board e2, the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, the connection board e6, and the panel board e7 are independent (separate) circuit boards. The main control board e1, the sub control board e2, the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, the connection board e6, and the panel board e7 are each accommodated in individual board cases (not shown). ing.
The main control board e1, the sub control board e2, and the panel board e7 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board e1, the sub control board e2, and the panel board e7 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, and the connection board e6 are included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, and the connection board e6 are attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3.

The pachinko machine 1 includes various control circuits.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (electric power) to the main control circuit 200, the effect control circuit 300, the payout control circuit 400, the control circuits 200, 300, 400, and the like. And a power supply circuit 600 to be supplied.
Each control circuit 200, 300, 400 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores a program related to the progress of the game and data necessary for the progress of the game, and a CPU that is stored in the ROM. And a RAM (Random Access Memory) serving as a temporary storage area used for proceeding with a process based on a program.

The main control circuit 200 is mounted on the main control board e1. The main control circuit 200 includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, an input port 240, an output port 250, a frequency generation circuit 260, and a hard random number generation circuit 270.
The input port 240 includes a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input port 0 to input port 3).

The input port 0 includes a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107 (glass frame opening signal), a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 (inner frame opening signal), and a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113 (board surface vibration detection). Sensor signal), detection signal from one radio wave detection sensor 114 (panel surface radio wave detection sensor signal 2), detection signal from three magnetic detection sensors 115 (out mouth magnetic field detection sensor signal, panel surface magnetic field detection sensor signal 1, panel surface magnetic field) Detection sensor signal 2) and the like are input.
Detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107 (glass frame opening signal), detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 (inner frame opening signal), and from the magnetic detection sensor 115 disposed in the inner frame unit 3 The detection signal (out-port magnetic detection sensor signal) is input to the input port 0 through the payout control board e3 and the inner frame board e4.
Detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113 (board surface vibration detection sensor signal), detection signal from one radio wave detection sensor 114 (board surface radio wave detection sensor signal 2), and each magnetic detection sensor disposed on the game board 11 The detection signals (panel surface magnetic detection sensor signal 1, panel surface magnetic detection sensor signal 2) from 115 are input to the input port 0 via the panel substrate e7.

The input port 1 receives a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch, a detection signal (not shown) from the key rotation detection switch 111, a detection signal (not shown) from the set value selection switch, and the like.
The input port 2 has a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the right prize opening switch 105, a detection signal from the left prize opening switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and a signal from the other radio wave detection sensor 114. A detection signal (board surface radio wave detection sensor signal 1) or the like is input.
The input port 3 receives a detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101, a detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, and the like.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor). In each reception storage area, 1-bit data indicating a reception state of a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is set.
Specifically, each reception storage area is set to “1” when a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is input, and when a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is not input, “0” is set.

The output port 250 includes a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output port 0 to output port 4).
The output port 0 outputs a data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display 60. The data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 510 described later.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling lighting of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61. The common signal output from the output port 1 is input to a sink driver 530 described later.
The output port 2 outputs external signals (OUT1 to OUT6, OUT8). The external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer 450 via the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, and the external terminal board e5.
External signals (OUT1 to OUT6, OUT8) output from the output port 2 are input to the hall computer 450 through the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, and the external terminal board e5.

The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the driving of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the driving of the special prize opening solenoid 65, and the like. Each control signal output from the output port 3 is input to the solenoids 64 and 65 via the panel substrate e7.
The output port 4 outputs a data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61. The data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 520 described later.

The main control circuit 200 includes a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand transmission signal) from the command output port 1 to the effect control circuit 300, and transmits a control command (payout command transmission) from the command output port 2 to the payout control circuit 400. Signal).
The command output port 1 and the command output port 2 are respectively a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), a transmission shift register (not shown), have.
The transmission data register outputs a control command input based on a subcommand transmission process (step S2-4), which will be described later, to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of a plurality of registers, and can store a plurality of control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control command input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control command to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the effect control circuit 300 or the payout control circuit 400 as serial data.

Further, a test signal output circuit 900 is mounted on the main control board e1.
In the test signal management process (step S4-18) described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (such as a big hit gaming state, an execution state of time reduction control, a special symbol lottery probability state). The generated test signal is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from a predetermined output port.
A test signal output from a predetermined output port is input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit 900.
Also, a detection signal from the special figure 1 start opening switch 101, a detection signal from the special figure 2 start opening switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, a detection signal from the count switch 103, and a detection from the right winning opening switch 105 A signal, a detection signal from the left winning opening switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and the like are input to the input port 240 and also to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit 900. The
Further, a control signal for controlling driving of each solenoid (normal electric accessory solenoid 64, big prize opening solenoid 65, etc.) outputted from the output port 3 is inputted to each solenoid 64, 65 and a test signal. The data is input to the interface board of the test computer via the output circuit 900.

The main control circuit 200 includes a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in FIG. 4, the memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) assigned to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) assigned to the RAM 230. .
Here, in FIG. 4, the address for specifying the memory area is shown in hexadecimal (“H” indicates that it is hexadecimal).

The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) is provided with a use area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and a non-use area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The use area m1 stores (stores) a program and data for controlling the progress of the game.
The non-use area m2 includes a program and data for executing processing related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules, and a program and data for controlling display of the performance display device 61 (a program for calculating a base ratio described later) And data) are stored (stored).
The use area m1 is provided with a program area (0000H to 0A89H), an unused area (0A8AH to 0FFFH), and a data area (1000H to 1A7AH). In the program area, a program for controlling the progress of the game is stored. On the other hand, data for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the data area. The used area m1 may be configured without including an unused area.
In the non-use area m2, a program area (2000H to 27FFH) and a data area (2800H to 2BFFH) are provided. The program area stores a program for executing a process related to a test determined by the gaming machine rules and a program for controlling display on the performance display device 61. On the other hand, the data area stores data for executing processing related to the test determined by the gaming machine rules and data for controlling the display of the performance display device 61.
In addition to the use area m1 and the non-use area m2, the ROM 220 includes an unused area (1A7BH to 1DFFH), a ROM comment area (1E00H to 1EFFH), a program management area (2FC0H to 2FFFH), and the like. Yes.
Arbitrary data such as a program title and version is stored in the ROM comment area. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
In the ROM 220, an unused area m3 of a predetermined byte (for example, 4 bytes or more) is provided between the use area m1 and the non-use area m2. Thereby, the boundary between the use area m1 and the non-use area m2 is clarified.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) is provided with a use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and a non-use area M2 (F210H to F228H).
The use area M1 is used when executing a process based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. In other words, in the use area M1, various data are temporarily stored when executing the processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.
The out-of-use area M2 is a process based on a program stored in the out-of-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules or a program for controlling display of the performance display device 61). Used when executing That is, in the non-use area M2, a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test determined by the gaming machine rules or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61) When executing the processing based on the above, various data are temporarily stored.
Specifically, in the use area M1, input / output data in the main control circuit 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), flags for managing lottery results and gaming states, etc. are temporarily stored. Memorized. In particular, the use area M1 is an area for storing start information acquired in response to input of detection signals from each of the special figure 1 start opening switch 101, the special figure 2 start opening switch 102, and the gate switch 104 ( A starting information storage area (to be described later) is provided.
The use area M1 is provided with a work area (F000H to F12AH), an unused area (F12BH to F1D7H), and a stack area (F1D8H to F1FFH). The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. The used area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
The non-use area M2 is provided with a work area (F210H to F21FH) and a stack area (F220H to F228H). The work area is executing a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test determined by the gaming machine rules or a program for controlling display of the performance display device 61). In addition, it is used as an area for temporarily storing various data. On the other hand, the stack area is executing a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test determined by the gaming machine rules or a program for controlling display of the performance display device 61). In addition, it is used as an area for temporarily saving various data.
Further, the RAM 230 is provided with an unused area M3 of a predetermined byte (4 bytes or more) between the use area M1 and the non-use area M2. Thereby, the boundary between the use area M1 and the non-use area M2 is clarified.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in processing based on a program (program for controlling the progress of a game) stored in the use area m1, it is permitted to refer to data stored in the non-use area M2. Yes.
On the other hand, it is prohibited to rewrite (change) the data stored in the non-use area M2 by the processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Yes.
Further, in a process based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test determined by the gaming machine rules or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61), the use area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, the area used by the process based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (the program for executing the process related to the test defined by the gaming machine rules or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61) It is prohibited to rewrite (change) the data stored in M1.
The game in the pachinko machine 1 can be advanced (completed) by a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.

The frequency generation circuit 260 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment), and outputs this clock to each of the CPU 210 and the hard random number generation circuit 270.
A hard random number generation circuit 270 generates a first loop counter that generates a random number for a normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter that generates a big random number for a first special symbol lottery, and a big hit random number for a second special symbol lottery. The third loop counter includes a fourth loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
Each time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260, the first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) by one, A random number is generated per normal symbol drawing. In the present embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
Each time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260, the second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter one by one within a predetermined range (in the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment). A big hit random number of the first special symbol lottery is generated. In the present embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
Each time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260, the third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter one by one within a predetermined range (in the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment). A big hit random number of the second special symbol lottery is generated. In the present embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
Each time 32 clocks are input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (once every division of the clock frequency by 32), the fourth loop counter sets the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, 0 to 10006). Reach group random numbers are generated by updating one by one in the range. In the present embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 2.666 [μs]).

The main control board e1 is provided with a set value operation unit (not shown). The set value operation unit includes a key rotation detection switch 111, a set value selection switch 112, and a set value display device 62.
The key rotation detection switch 111 has an operation unit that can be switched between a setting permission state and a setting prohibition state. The key rotation detection switch 111 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 when the operation unit is switched to the setting permission state. On the other hand, the key rotation detection switch 111 stops outputting the detection signal to the main control circuit 200 when the operation unit is switched to the setting prohibited state.
In the present embodiment, a keyhole into which a dedicated key is inserted is provided in the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111. In the key rotation detection switch 111, the state of the operation unit (setting permission state or setting prohibition state) can be switched by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole. That is, in the key rotation detection switch 111, the state of the operation unit (setting permission state or setting prohibition state) cannot be switched unless a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole.
Further, in the key rotation detection switch 111, it is possible to insert a dedicated key into the keyhole when the operation unit is in a setting prohibited state, and it is possible to remove the dedicated key from the keyhole. On the other hand, with the key rotation detection switch 111, it is impossible to insert a dedicated key into the keyhole when the operation unit is in a setting-permitted state, and it is impossible to remove the dedicated key from the keyhole. Become.
The set value selection switch 112 has an operation unit that can be pressed. The set value selection switch 112 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 every time the operation unit is pressed.
The set value display device 62 is configured by a 7-segment LED or the like. The set value display device 62 displays a set value to be described later. The set value display device 62 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11 so that it cannot be viewed by the player.

Here, the setting information (setting value) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The “setting information” is information for designating the winning probability (probability of winning the big hit gaming state) of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery).
The RAM of the main control circuit 200 is provided with a setting information storage area. In the setting information storage area, any one of “1” to “6” is set (stored) as setting information. And in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to a probability according to the value set in the setting information storage area.
In the following description, the value stored in the setting information storage area is referred to as “setting value”.
In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery corresponding to each setting value is the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = “6” and the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = “5” in descending order of the winning probability. , Winning probability corresponding to setting value = “4”, winning probability corresponding to setting value = “3”, winning probability corresponding to setting value = “2”, winning probability corresponding to setting value = “1” (winning Probability “high” → winning probability “low”).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the set value can be changed (selected) when the power is turned on. Here, the change of the set value is executed by an administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
In the pachinko machine 1, the set value change permission state is started in response to the power being turned on while the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111 is displaced to the setting permission state.
During the setting value change permission state, the setting value display device 62 displays a value indicating a value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area.
In the setting value change permission state, each time the setting value selection switch 112 is pressed, the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area is changed. At this time, when the value (set value) set in the setting information storage area is changed, the value (value indicating the set value) displayed on the set value display device 62 is also changed accordingly. Be changed.
As a result, the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 sets a desired value among “1” to “6” as a setting value by pressing the setting value selection switch 112 while the setting value change permission state is set. (Select).
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the setting value change permission state is terminated in response to the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111 being switched from the setting permission state to the setting prohibition state. This makes it impossible to change the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area. Further, the display of the value indicating the set value on the set value display device 62 is ended in accordance with the end of the set value change permission state.

The main control board e1 is provided with a performance display device 61. The performance display device 61 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11 so that it cannot be viewed by the player.
The performance display device 61 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured by a light emitting element (in the present embodiment, an LED).
In the performance display device 61, the number of game balls launched into the game area 30 and a predetermined entrance (in this embodiment, the first start port 51, the second start port 52, and other winning ports 54 to 57). Information (base ratio described later) calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the entry of game balls into the game is displayed.
The performance display device 61 includes four (four digits) display units (not shown). Each display unit is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a 7-segment LED that can display numbers, symbols, and the like, and a dot-segment LED that can display dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 61 includes 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64). In the performance display device 61, the LEDs 33 to 40 are the first digit display unit, the LED 41 to LED48 are the second digit display unit, the LED 49 to LED56 are the third digit display unit, and the LED 57 to LED64. Is the fourth digit display.
The main control circuit 200 calculates a base ratio, which will be described later, during the occurrence of a predetermined gaming state (in this embodiment, during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and during the stop of the short-time control). Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 61.
“Base ratio” is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts to the number of outballs. The main control circuit 200 calculates a base ratio for each predetermined section (period).
In the present embodiment, a section in which a predetermined number (60000 [sphere] in this embodiment) of out balls is detected (discharged) is defined as the predetermined section. That is, each section is started in response to the end of the previous section, and is ended in response to the number of out balls detected in the current section reaching a predetermined number (60000 [sphere]). The main control circuit 200 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each section.
Here, a predetermined time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the main control circuit 200 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
“Number of out balls” refers to the number of out balls. “Out ball” refers to a game ball discharged from the game area 30. In the present embodiment, the out ball refers to a game ball (game ball detected by the out switch 109) that has passed through the discharge path.
Here, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game balls discharged from the out port 58, and the game balls detected by the out switch 109 may be set as the out balls.
“Number of payouts” refers to the total number of winning balls paid out in accordance with the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the other winning ports 54 to 57.
The performance display device 61 alternately displays the first base ratio and the second base ratio every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in the present embodiment).
The “first base ratio” is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the current time).
The “second base ratio” is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 61, information for identifying the type of the base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) by the upper two-digit display section of the four-digit display section. Is displayed. In the performance display device 61, the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the lower two digits of the four digits.

The effect control circuit 300 is mounted on the sub control board e2.
The effect control circuit 300 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input port, and an output port.
Based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200, the effect control circuit 300 displays effect images on the image display devices 31 and 32, lights the lamps 20 and 21, outputs sound by the sound generator 22, and various types. It controls the drive of a motor (not shown) that drives the movable body.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a program related to the progress of the effect, data necessary for the progress of the effect, and the like.
The RAM of the effect control circuit 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control circuit 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, and the like.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 determines the content of the effect to be executed based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200. Then, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, and the like are generated according to an effect program (effect control table) corresponding to the content of the determined effect. And the control signal based on each produced | generated control data is output with respect to each image display apparatuses 31 and 32, the sound generator 22, each lamp | ramp 20 and 21, each motor etc. FIG.

The payout control circuit 400 is mounted on the payout control board e3.
The payout control circuit 400 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input port, and an output port.
The payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 based on the detection signal input from the launch volume.
Specifically, the payout control circuit 400 controls the launch operation of the game ball by the game ball launching device 430 so that the game ball is launched to the game area 30 with a strength according to the detection signal input from the launch volume. To do.
Also, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 500.
Specifically, the ball lending button 7a transmits a ball lending operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board e6 in response to the pressing operation. When the CR unit 500 receives the ball lending operation signal, the CR unit 500 subtracts the frequency necessary for paying out a predetermined number of balls from the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the inserted prepaid card, The record of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card is updated, and a ball lending instruction signal instructing to pay out a predetermined number of game balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400 via the connection board e6. Further, when the payout control circuit 400 receives the ball lending instruction signal, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 so as to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.
When the prepaid cart is inserted and the record of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card is updated, the CR unit 500 sends a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium via the connection board e6. It transmits with respect to the display apparatus 7c. When the frequency signal is received, the frequency display device 7c displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium indicated by the frequency signal.
The return button 7b transmits a return operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board e6 in response to the pressing operation. When the CR unit 500 receives the return operation signal, it returns (discharges) the prepaid card in which the remaining frequency of the valuable medium remains.

(About various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed in response to the passage of the start gate 41 by a game ball. When a normal symbol lottery is won, a game state is generated per regular drawing. In the normal gaming state, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, so that the game ball can enter the second start port 52.
In the present embodiment, one type of “per common figure” is set as the type of game state per common figure that occurs when the normal symbol lottery is won.

In the case of winning the “per symbol” (winning the normal symbol lottery), the normal symbol display device controls the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed as “per symbol”.
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is lost, the normal symbol display device controls the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed as “offset symbol”.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time reduction control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During execution of the time reduction control, the time for displaying the variation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “variation time”) is shortened compared to when the time reduction control is stopped. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the time reduction control, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is improved and the time for displaying the variation of the normal symbol is shortened as compared to when the time reduction control is stopped. In addition, during execution of the time reduction control, the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is increased and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is increased in the gaming state per figure as compared to when the time reduction control is stopped. Extended.
In the case of winning the “per ordinary map”, the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is 0.5. [S] or 2.0 [s] is set. At this time, during the execution of the time-shortening control, the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 2.0 [s]. Is set. On the other hand, while the short-time control is stopped, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 0.5 [s]. Is done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first start port 51, and the second ball is input when the game ball enters the second start port 52. A special symbol lottery is executed. When the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won, a big hit gaming state is generated. In the big hit game state, a round game in which the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state is executed, and the game ball can enter the big winning opening 53.
In the present embodiment, “big hit 1” and “big hit 2” are set as the types of jackpot gaming state that are generated when the first special symbol lottery is won, and are generated when the second special symbol lottery is won. As the types of the big hit gaming state, “big hit 3” to “big hit 6” are set.

When the “big hit 1” is won, the special symbol 1 display device stops and displays the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “big hit one symbol”. In the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “probability variable symbol” is stopped and displayed.
Here, the “probable change symbol” is the same as the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, for example, “7, 7, 7”, etc. A display mode in which “numbered symbols” indicating odd numbers are arranged and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 indicates a predetermined color.
When the “big hit 2” is won, the special symbol 1 display device stops and displays the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “big hit 2 symbols”. In the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “normal symbol” is stopped and displayed.
Here, the “normal symbol” is the same as the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, for example, “2, 2, 2”, etc. A display mode is provided in which “number symbols” indicating even numbers are aligned and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 indicates a predetermined color.
When the “big hit 3” is won, the special symbol 2 display device stops and displays the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “big hit 3 symbols”. In the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “probability variable symbol” is stopped and displayed.
When the “big hit 4” is won, the special symbol 2 display device stops and displays the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “big hit 4 symbols”. In the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “probability variable symbol” is stopped and displayed.
When the “big hit 5” is won, the special symbol 2 display device stops and displays the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “big hit 5 symbols”. In the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “latent symbol” is stopped and displayed.
Here, the “latent symbol” is a predetermined symbol such as “1, 2, 3” in which the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is, for example, In addition to the combination having regularity, the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 is set to a display mode in which a predetermined color is displayed.
When the “big hit 6” is won, the special symbol 2 display device stops and displays the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “big hit 6 symbols”. In the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “latent symbol” is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery is lost (in the case of “out”), the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “out symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device or the special figure 2 display device. . In addition, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “missing symbol” is stopped and displayed.
Here, for example, the “offset symbol” indicates that the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is stopped and displayed in at least one area such as “1, 6, 9”, etc. The number indicated by the “numeric symbol” displayed is a combination different from the number indicated by the “numeric symbol” stopped and displayed in the other area, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. Is a display mode showing a predetermined color.

In the case of winning from “big hit 1” to “big hit 6”, a predetermined number of round games are executed in the big hit gaming state.
In the present embodiment, when winning “big hit 1”, “big hit 2”, “big hit 5” or “big hit 6”, the number of round games is set to 5 [times]. On the other hand, when the “big hit 3” is won, the number of round games is set to 15 [times]. On the other hand, when “big hit 4” is won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times].
When winning from “big hit 1” to “big hit 6”, the longest opening time of the special electric accessory 53a in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). The In each round game, the longest open time set after the special electric accessory 53a is opened, and the number of game balls entering the big prize opening 53 in the round game is Of the fact that the predetermined upper limit number (10 [sphere] in the present embodiment) has been reached, the process is terminated when one of the conditions is satisfied.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1, as the gaming state related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery), the “special symbol low probability state”, the “special symbol high probability state”, Is stipulated.
During the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to the first probability (hereinafter referred to as “low probability”).
During the occurrence of the “special drawing high probability state”, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to a second probability higher than the first probability (hereinafter referred to as “high probability”).
The main control circuit 200 sets the winning probability of each lottery so that the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery is synchronized with the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery. Here, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery means the probability of winning the “hit” (“hit 1” to “hit 6”) in which the big hit gaming state occurs.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a set of a value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area and a gaming state (a special figure low probability state or a special figure high probability state). Probability according to the match.

Specifically, during the occurrence of the set value = “1” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 319.69. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “1” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 32.13.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “2” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 312.08. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “2” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery becomes 1 / 31.36.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “3” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery becomes 1 / 304.82. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “3” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery becomes 1 / 30.62.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “4” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 297.89. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “4” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 29.93.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “5” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 291.27. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “5” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 29.26.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “6” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 284.94. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “6” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 28.62.

When the “hit 2” or “hit 6” is won, the “special figure low probability state” is generated during the period from the end of the big hit gaming state to the occurrence of the next big hit gaming state.
On the other hand, when winning “big hit 1” or “big hit 3” to “big hit 5”, a “special figure high probability state” is generated in accordance with the end of the big hit gaming state. In the present embodiment, the “special figure high probability state” is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and is ended in response to the start of the next jackpot gaming state (end of the “big hit symbol” stop display).
The “special figure high probability state” is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state” is a predetermined number (for example, 10000 [ It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the process is terminated in response to reaching (time) ”(a“ special figure low probability state ”occurs).
In addition, when winning from “big hit 1” to “big hit 6”, the time reduction control is executed after the big hit gaming state ends.
Time-shortening control is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, winning a special symbol lottery ("Big-hit symbol" is stopped and displayed), and notification display (variable display) of a predetermined number of short-time special symbols And the stop display) are executed when one of the conditions is satisfied.
When winning the “big hit 2” or “big hit 6”, 100 [times] is set as the predetermined number of times.
on the other hand. When winning “big hit 1” or “big hit 3” to “big hit 5”, 10000 [times] is set as the predetermined number of times.

(About control commands)
Next, control commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 and control commands transmitted / received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 will be described.
The main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300, and communication from the effect control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 200 is performed. Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 is composed of 1-byte upper data indicating the type of the control command and 1-byte lower data indicating the contents of the control command. Yes.
Then, the main control circuit 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control circuit 300 by serial communication. When the production control circuit 300 receives a control command from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interruption occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interruption process.

In the pachinko machine 1, as control commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300, a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a game state designation command, the number of holds A designation command, an opening designation command, a round start designation command, a round end designation command, an ending designation command, a first prefetch designation command, a second prefetch designation command, a third prefetch designation command, and the like are set.
The symbol type designation command is a command for designating the type of the symbol to be stopped (one of the “missing symbols” and “one jackpot symbol” to “six jackpot symbols”). The symbol type designation command is transmitted when the special symbol variable display is started. In the present embodiment, symbols corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set as the symbol type designation command.
The variation mode designation command is a command for designating the type of variation mode (variation mode number). The variation mode designation command designates the variation time associated with the variation mode number by designating the variation mode number. The variation mode designation command designates the variation time of the first half period (a mode of the first half period of the variation effect) of the special symbol variation display (variation effect).
In the present embodiment, m (plural) types of variation modes associated with different variation times are set as the variation mode types. The variation mode designation command designates one of the m types of variation modes (variation mode number) (“variation mode m”).
The variation pattern designation command is a command for designating a variation pattern type (variation pattern number). The variation pattern designation command designates the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by designating the variation pattern number. The variation pattern designation command designates the variation time of the latter half period (the aspect of the second half period of the variation effect) of the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, n (plural) types of variation patterns associated with different variation times are set as the variation pattern types. Then, the variation pattern designation command designates one of the n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern n”).
The variation mode designation command and the variation pattern designation command are transmitted at the start of variation display of the special symbol.

The stop designation command is a command for designating stop display of a special symbol (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol stop display.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the “gaming state offset value” is information for designating the gaming state. In the present embodiment, as the gaming state offset value, each of the combinations of the value of the short time control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, and the value of the big hit after rotation counter Corresponding numerical value is set.
The gaming state designation command designates one gaming state offset value. The game state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on or when a special game phase to be described later is changed.
Here, as the gaming state offset value, the value of the short time control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, the value of the big hit post-rotation counter, and the setting information storage area are stored. A numerical value corresponding to each combination of the value (set value) being set may be set. Then, when transmitting the game state designation command, the value of the short time control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag, and the number of revolutions after the jackpot are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 Checking the value of the counter and the value stored in the setting information storage area, calculating a gaming state offset value corresponding to the confirmation result, and a gaming state designation command for designating the calculated gaming state offset value The sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 may be stored (transmitted to the effect control circuit 300).

The hold number designation command is a command for designating the hold number. In the present embodiment, the number-of-holds designation command designates that the number of holds (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) has increased by “1”, that the hold number has decreased by “1”, the hold number, etc. .
Here, the “special figure 1 hold number” refers to the number of the notice display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol on the special figure 1 display device. Also, the “special figure 2 hold number” means the number of the second special symbol notification display (fluctuation display and stop display) held on the special figure 2 display device.
The number-of-holds designation command is transmitted when power is turned on, when starting information is stored, when a special symbol variation display is started, or the like. In the present embodiment, commands corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set as the hold number designation commands.

The opening designation command is a command for designating the start of the opening period (start of the big hit gaming state). The opening designation command designates the type of the big hit gaming state to be started (= type of stop symbol (one type of “one big hit symbol” to “six big hit symbols”)). The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the big hit gaming state).
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a round game. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of the round game.
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of the round game. The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round game.
The ending designation command is a command for designating the start of the ending period. The ending designation command is transmitted at the start of the ending period.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command for designating a stop symbol type (one of the “missing symbols” and “one jackpot symbol” to “six jackpot symbols”). In the present embodiment, the first prefetch designation command is set corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The second prefetch designation command is a command for designating the contents of the variation mode. Specifically, the second look-ahead designation command indicates that the type of variation mode is undefined (“undefined value”), or one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) (“variation mode m”). ) Is specified. The second prefetch designation command is transmitted when starting information is stored.
The third prefetch designation command is a command for designating the contents of the variation pattern. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command indicates that the type of variation pattern is undefined (“undefined value”), or one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) (“variation pattern n”). ) Is specified. The third prefetch designation command is transmitted when starting information is stored.

The main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is performed in both directions. Each control command transmitted / received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is composed of 1-byte data.
The main control circuit 200 transmits a control command to the payout control circuit 400 by serial communication. In the payout control circuit 400, when a control command is received from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Also, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a control command to the main control circuit 200 by serial communication. In the main control circuit 200, when a control command is received from the payout control circuit 400, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.
In the pachinko machine 1, a prize ball number designation command or the like is set as a control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In the present embodiment, the prize ball number designation command designates the payout of n (n = 1 to 15) prize balls. The award ball number designation command is transmitted when the award ball payout operation is executed by the payout control circuit 400.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, control commands transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200 include occurrence / release of payout errors, occurrence / release of full tank errors, occurrence / release of ball clogging errors, etc. Control commands that specify each are set. Each control command is transmitted upon detection of occurrence / release of various errors.

(Processing executed by main control circuit 200)
Next, processing executed by the main control circuit 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured in the main control circuit 200 will be described.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the hard random number generation circuit 270 starts a hard random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, every time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]), the values of the first to third loop counters are within a predetermined range. Within the range (in the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment), it is updated by “1”.
In addition, in the hard random number update processing, every time 32 clocks are input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (in this embodiment, every 2.666 [μs]), the value of the fourth loop counter is within a predetermined range (this In the embodiment, “1” is updated in the range of 0 to 10006.
The hard random number update process updates the normal symbol lottery random number, the first special symbol lottery big hit random number, the second special symbol lottery big hit random number, and the reach group random number. The hard random number update process is executed as a function of the hard random number generation circuit 270 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on software.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift register of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmits the control command stored in the FIFO buffer to the effect control circuit 300 or the payout control circuit 400. Starts the control command transmission process. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on software.

Next, game control processing executed by the CPU 210 of the main control circuit 200 based on a program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220 and settings necessary for executing various processes are performed.
In step S1-2, a wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time is set in the timer counter. Then, measurement of the set wait processing time by the timer counter is started. Also, the RAM clear signal is read.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a ram clear switch (not shown). When the power is turned on while the ram clear switch is pressed, a ram clear signal is input to the input port 240 (input port 1).
In the RAM clear signal reading process, a value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal of the input port 240 is read.

In step S1-3, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.
In step S1-4, a RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission processing, processing necessary for permitting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.
In step S1-5, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the backup effective flag area of the RAM 230, and if it is determined that “1” is set in the backup effective flag area (Yes), If the process proceeds to step S1-6 and it is determined that “0” is set in the backup valid flag area (No), the process proceeds to step S1-17.

In step S1-6, a used area checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-7. In the used area checksum calculation process, the checksum is calculated based on information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
In step S1-7, a non-use area checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the non-use area checksum calculation process, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F210H to F228H) of the RAM 230 in the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in steps S1-6 and S1-7 is normal. If it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), step S1-9 is performed. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-17.
Here, “the checksum value of the use area M1 calculated in step S1-6 matches the checksum value of the use area M1 stored in the checksum buffer area” and “step S1- When the checksum value of the non-use area M2 calculated in step 7 matches the checksum value of the non-use area M2 stored in the checksum buffer area " It is determined that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, “the checksum value of the use area M1 calculated in step S1-6 matches the checksum value of the use area M1 stored in the checksum buffer area” and “step S1-7. The checksum value of the non-use area M2 calculated in step 1 matches the checksum value of the non-use area M2 stored in the checksum buffer area ”. If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, based on the value read in step S1-2 (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal), it is determined whether or not the ram clear signal is input. If it is determined that no input has been made (No), the process proceeds to step S1-10. If it is determined that a ram clear signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
In step S1-10, a backup valid flag release process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-11. In the backup valid flag release process, “0” is set in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-11, initialization processing at the time of power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-12. In the power recovery initialization process, the RAM 230 initializes data to be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored (when the data before the power is shut off) is maintained.
In step S1-12, a power recovery subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-13. In the subcommand transmission process at the time of power recovery, a subcommand (control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300) specifying that the power supply has been recovered is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. Further, a subcommand for designating a value set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-13, a power supply return payout command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the power return payout command transmission process, a payout command (control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400) designating that the power supply has been recovered from the power shutdown is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do.

In step S1-14, an effect return subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the effect return subcommand transmission process, the effect return subcommand (power recovery return phase designation command, gaming state designation command, power supply restoration designation command, etc.) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the “power supply restoration phase designation command” is a control command for designating a special game phase in which the performance is restored.
In the effect return subcommand transmission process, first, the current special game phase is confirmed based on the value of the special game phase flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. Then, a power return phase designation command for designating the confirmed special game phase is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Also, a gaming state offset value is calculated based on the current gaming state. Specifically, the value of the time reduction control flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed. Then, a gaming state offset value corresponding to the confirmation result is calculated. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-15, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the interrupt initial setting process, the CTC (counter / timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, the CPU 210 sets an interrupt vector register, and sets an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in the present embodiment) in the CTC.

In step S1-16, a set value change permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to a main loop process (step S2-1).
In the set value change permission process, first, it is determined whether or not a set value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the set value change permission condition is satisfied, “1” is set in the set value change permission flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set value change permission condition is not satisfied, “0” is set in the set value change permission flag area of the RAM 230.
In the present embodiment, both “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the inner frame unit 3 is opened (or the integrated door unit 4 is opened)”. If the above condition is satisfied, it is determined that the set value change condition is satisfied.
On the other hand, at least one of “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the inner frame unit 3 is opened (or the integrated door unit 4 is opened)”. If the above condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the set value change condition is not satisfied.
In addition, when both the conditions that “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the door opening information (external signal) is being output” are satisfied, the setting value change condition is satisfied. Determined and set when at least one of the conditions that "the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111" and "the door opening information (external signal) is being output" is not satisfied It may be configured to determine that the value change condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-17, a non-use area initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-18. In the unused area initialization process, the unused area M2 in the RAM 230 is initialized.
Specifically, in the unused area initialization process, information stored in the unused area M2 is cleared (initialized). As a result, the work area and the stack area of the non-use area M2 are all initialized, and the contents are erased even if valid backup information is stored.
In step S1-18, a use area initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the use area initialization process, the use area M1 in the RAM 230 is initialized.
Specifically, in the use area initialization process, information stored in the use area M1 is cleared (initialized). As a result, the work area and the stack area of the use area M1 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
That is, predetermined initial values are set as values of various flag areas (time reduction control flag area, special figure high probability state flag area, previous big hit symbol flag area, special game phase flag area, normal game phase flag area, etc.) . Also, predetermined initial values (“0” in the present embodiment) are set as the values of various counter areas (time-short counter area, big hit post-rotation counter area, etc.). Further, a predetermined initial value (“3” in the present embodiment) is set in the setting information storage area.
In this embodiment, when the checksum is not normal, the use area M1 is initialized after the non-use area M2 is initialized. On the other hand, when the checksum is normal, the use area M1 is initialized only when the RAM clear signal is input.
As a result, as long as the checksum is normal, the non-use area M2 is not initialized even if the RAM clear signal is input. Therefore, even if the RAM clear switch is operated, information on the base ratio (not used) Information stored in the area M2) can be maintained.

In step S1-19, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand designating that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM230. In addition, a subcommand designating a value (setting value = “3”) set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-20, a RAM clear payout command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the RAM clear payout command transmission process, a payout command designating that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the main loop process.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-16) shown in FIG. 5 ends, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, an interrupt prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state for prohibiting interrupts of other processes is set. As a result, during the period when the interrupt disabled state is set, execution of power-off saving processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, the “initial value random number” is a random number for determining an initial value and an end value of a soft random number (a random symbol random number, a reach mode random number, a variation pattern random number, etc.) that is a random number generated in the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within a range from a preset initial value to an end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, main command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, a main command received from the payout control circuit 400 (a control command transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200) is analyzed, and a process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, a subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 250 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission process in step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition process in step S2-1, execution of the power-off saving process, timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted. Interrupt enabled period.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, soft random numbers excluding the winning design random numbers (reach mode random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

Next, the power-off saving process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the power-off saving process.
The power supply circuit 600 is connected to a power cutoff detection circuit (not shown). The power shutdown detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied by the power supply circuit 600 and outputs a power shutdown notice signal to the main control circuit 200 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value. .
When the CPU 210 receives the power-off notice signal, the CPU 210 starts the power-off saving process shown in FIG. 7 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The power saving shutdown process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the power-off saving process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the power saving shutdown process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register saving process, the register value used during the execution of the main loop process is saved in the saving area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, a power-off notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the power shutdown notice signal is read from the power shutdown detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power shutdown notice signal reading process, a value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal), is the power shutdown notice signal input from the power shutdown detection circuit? If it is determined (bit check) and it is determined that the power shutdown notice signal is input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and it is determined that the power shutdown notice signal is not input. In (No), it transfers to step S3-14.

In step S3-4, an output port stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop process, output of control signals and control commands by the output port 250 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped. Further, the detection signal input to the input port 240 (input port 0 to input port 3) is stopped.
In step S3-5, a used area checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the used area checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated based on information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum buffer area.
In step S3-6, a non-use area checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the non-use area checksum saving process, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F210H to F228H) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum buffer area.
In step S3-7, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the backup valid flag setting process, “1” is set in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-8, a RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the work area (including the use-prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-9, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times of power-off notice signal reading is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-10, a power shutdown notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-11. In the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the power shutdown notice signal is read from the power shutdown detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power shutdown notice signal reading process, a value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-11, based on the value read in step S3-10 (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal), is the power-off notice signal input from the power-off detection circuit? If it is determined that the power-off notice signal is not input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-12, and if it is determined that the power-off notice signal is input (Yes). Shifts to Step S3-9.
In step S3-12, loop counter update processing is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S3-13. In the loop counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the return determination loop counter is newly set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-13, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is “0” (Yes), the CPU When the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S1-1) and it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S3-10.
In step S3-14, a register return process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S3-1 is restored. Then, after the completion of the register restoration process, the process returns to the main loop process (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The frequency generation circuit 260 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in the present embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 8 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register saving process, all register values used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in the saving area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission process, an interrupt is permitted.
In step S4-3, a set value management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. The set value management process will be described later.

In step S4-4, dynamic port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the dynamic port output process, a control signal is output to each LED constituting the main display device 60 and the performance display device 61.
Specifically, in the dynamic port output process, first, the values of all bits included in the port register of the output port 0 are initialized. As a result, the output of each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) is stopped (becomes a low level).
Next, the values of all the bits included in the port register of the output port 4 are initialized. As a result, the output of each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) is stopped (becomes a low level).
Next, the common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area included in the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 is updated. Thus, each time the dynamic port output process is executed, the common signal to be output (common signal to be high level) is switched. In the present embodiment, lighting of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61 is controlled by a common common signal.
Next, the output of each common signal (each of “COM0” to “COM3”) by the output port 1 is controlled in accordance with the common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area.
Next, according to the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area included in the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230, each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA0” to “ SEGDATA7 ") output is controlled.
Next, according to the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area included in the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230, each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA0" to "" 7SEGDATA7 ") is controlled.

In step S4-5, port input processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the port input process, the latest switch state is accurately acquired.
Specifically, in the port input process, it is determined whether or not an ON state has occurred for each detection signal input to the input port 240 (input port 0 to input port 3). At this time, based on information set in the reception storage area corresponding to each detection signal (each detection switch / detection sensor), it is determined whether or not the detection signal is on. When it is determined that an ON state has occurred for each detection signal, information indicating that the ON state has occurred (detected) for the detection signal is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230.
Here, the “on state” refers to a state in which the detection signal is not input (low level) to a state where the detection signal is input (high level).

In step S4-6, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-7. In the timer update process, various timers are updated. Specifically, in the timer update process, the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, external information timer, etc.) are updated.
In step S4-7, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-8. The initial value random number update process in step S4-7 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2. Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-8, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-9. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning symbol random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-9, switch management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the switch management processing, processing (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) corresponding to the state of each switch 101, 102, 104 (whether or not an on state is detected) is executed. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-10, an addition number calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. In the addition number calculation process, a value to be added to an out-ball number counter described later and a value to be added to a payout number counter described later are calculated and set.
That is, in the addition number calculation process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined gaming state. And when it determines with it not being a predetermined | prescribed gaming state, the non-predetermined gaming state addition number calculation process mentioned later is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state is the predetermined game state, an addition number calculation process for a predetermined game state described later is executed.
In the present embodiment, when the “special figure low probability state” is occurring and when the time reduction control is stopped, it is determined that the game state is the predetermined game state. On the other hand, if at least one of the “special figure high probability state” is being generated and the time-shortening control is being executed, it is determined that the game state is not the predetermined game state.

In the non-predetermined gaming state addition number calculation process, first, the value stored in the out-ball number addition value storage area is cleared, and the value stored in the payout number addition value storage area is cleared.
Next, “0” is set as a value to be added to the out ball number counter in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230.
Next, “0” is set as a value to be added to the payout number counter in the payout number addition value storage area of the RAM 230.

On the other hand, in the predetermined gaming state addition number calculation process, first, the value stored in the out-ball number addition value storage area is cleared, and the value stored in the payout number addition value storage area is cleared. Also, “0” is set as the value of the payout number calculation counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has been detected, “1” is set as a value to be added to the out ball number counter in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, “0” is set as a value to be added to the out ball number counter in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 has been detected, the winning ball paid out in accordance with the game ball entering the right other winning port 54 as the value of the payout number calculation counter The number “10” is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 is not detected, addition to the value of the payout number calculation counter is not executed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the left winning port switch winning ball 106 is detected. If it is determined that the on state of the left winning port switch winning ball 106 has been detected, the value of the payout number calculation counter is paid out according to the game ball entering the left other winning ports 55-57. Add “10” which is the number of prize balls. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 is not detected, addition to the value of the payout number calculation counter is not executed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected, a prize ball that is paid out in accordance with the number of game balls that enter the first start port 51 is set to the value of the payout number calculation counter. The number “3” is added. When it is determined that the on-state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is not detected, addition to the value of the payout number calculation counter is not executed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, a prize ball that is paid out in accordance with the game ball entering the second start port 52 as the value of the payout number calculation counter. The number “1” is added. When it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is not detected, addition to the value of the payout number calculation counter is not executed.
Next, in the payout amount addition value storage area of the RAM 230, the value of the payout number calculation counter is set as a value to be added to the payout number counter.

In step S4-11, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device and the operation of the special electric accessory 53a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-12, a normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the ordinary game management process, the operation of the general-purpose display device and the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, error management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the error management process, various errors (abnormal conditions) are determined, and settings are made according to the determination results.
In step S4-14, a winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the winning opening switch processing, processing (update of various counters, etc.) corresponding to the state of each switch 101 to 103, 105, 106 (whether or not an on state is detected) is executed.
In step S4-15, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-14, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In the present embodiment, as the prize ball control counter, the prize ball control counter 1 that stores the number of ball game balls that have entered the big prize opening 53 and the number of ball game balls that have entered the right other prize opening 54 are stored. The prize ball control counter 2, the prize ball control counter 3 in which the number of ball game balls entered in the upper left / left middle / lower left other prize holes 55 to 57 are stored, and the ball game ball entered in the first start hole 51. And the prize ball control counter 4 in which the number of ball game balls that have entered the second start port 52 are stored.

In the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (15 [balls] in this embodiment) of payout balls is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. After that, when the payout of the prize ball by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a main command designating the completion of the payout to the main control circuit 200. Then, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) of payout balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (3 [balls] in this embodiment) of payout of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (1 [ball] in the present embodiment) of payout balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.

In step S4-16, a launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the launch position designation management process, a process related to launch position designation is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from a state in which the launch of the game ball to the left route is designated to a state in which the launch of the game ball to the right route is designated (at the start of the big hit gaming state, etc.) In addition, a subcommand for designating the game ball to be placed on the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a subcommand for designating the launch of the game ball on the right path is transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.

In step S4-17, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer 450 (or data display device) is set.
In the present embodiment, as the external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to the external device (the electronic device such as the hall computer 450 and the data display device), the symbol determination number information (OUT1), the start port information (OUT2), the jackpot Information (OUT3 to OUT6), security information, out-payout number information (OUT8), setting value changing information, and the like are defined.
The “symbol determination frequency information” is external information regarding the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation display and stop display). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol determination number information to the hall computer 450 (or the data display device) every time the number of executions of the special symbol stop display reaches a predetermined number.
“Starting port information” is external information relating to the entrance of game balls into the starting ports 51 and 52. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the start port information to the hall computer 450 (or the data display device) every time an on state of the detection signals input from the start port switches 101 and 102 is detected. .
The “hit information” is external information regarding the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. The main control circuit 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer 450 (or data display device) every time a jackpot gaming state is generated.
The “out port payout information” is external information regarding the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the out port 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out-payout number information to the hall computer 450 every time the value of the external information out-ball number counter reaches a predetermined value.
“Setting value changing information” is external information indicating that the setting value is being changed (that the setting value change permission condition is satisfied). The CPU 210 always outputs an external signal corresponding to the setting value changing information to the hall computer 450 during the period in which “1” is set in the setting value changing flag area.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information confirmation number counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information determination number counter has reached a predetermined value, the symbol determination number information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information determination number counter. As a result, symbol determination frequency information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information start entrance ball number counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the external information start opening ball count counter has reached a predetermined value, the start opening information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information start entrance ball number counter. Thereby, start port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information jackpot counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot counter has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot counter. As a result, jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information out ball counter reaches a predetermined value (10 [sphere] in the present embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information out ball counter has reached a predetermined value, the outlet payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (10 [spheres] in the present embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information out ball counter. As a result, out-port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting value changing flag area. If it is determined that “1” is set in the setting value changing flag area, the setting value changing information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the setting value changing information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.

In step S4-18, a test signal management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the test signal management process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal management process is a process based on a program for executing a process related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules. That is, the test signal management process is a process based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
Specifically, in the test signal management process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (big hit game state, execution state of short-time control, probability state of special symbol lottery, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. To remember.
In step S4-19, a performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. The performance display device control process will be described later.
In step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, control data (drive data) for controlling lighting of a predetermined display device is set in the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (driving data) output to the solenoids 64 and 65 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S4-22, port output processing is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer 450, the solenoids 64 and 65, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output port 250 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer 450. Further, the solenoids 64 and 65 are driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, a register return process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S4-1 is restored. Then, after the completion of the register restoration process, the process returns to the main loop process (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, the setting value management process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the set value management process.
When the set value management process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 9, first, the process proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting value change permission flag area, and when it is determined that “1” is set in the setting value change permission flag area (Yes). Shifts to step S29-2, and when it is determined that “0” is set in the set value change permission flag area (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S4-4) is performed. ).
In step S29-2, it is determined whether or not the set value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the set value change permission condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-3 and the set value is changed. If it is determined that the change permission condition is not satisfied (No), the process proceeds to step S29-6.
As described above, both “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the inner frame unit 3 is opened (or the integrated door unit 4 is opened)”. If the above condition is satisfied, it is determined that the set value change condition is satisfied.
On the other hand, at least one of “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the inner frame unit 3 is opened (or the integrated door unit 4 is opened)”. If this condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the set value change condition is not satisfied.
Note that when both the conditions that “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the door opening information (external signal) is being output” are satisfied, the setting value change condition is satisfied. If “a detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the door opening information (external signal) is being output” is not satisfied, The configuration may be such that it is determined that the set value change condition is not satisfied.

In step S29-3, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the set value selection switch 112. If it is determined that a detection signal is input from the set value selection switch 112 (Yes), step S29 is performed. If it is determined that the detection signal is not input from the set value selection switch 112 (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4).
In step S29-4, a setting value changing process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the setting value changing process, the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area is changed. Here, in this embodiment, every time a detection signal is input from the set value selection switch 112, a predetermined order (for example, set value = “1”, set value = “2”, set value = “3”, set value). Value = “4”, setting value = “5”, setting value = “6”, setting value = “1”, setting value = “2”.
In step S29-5, a set value display update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the set value display update process, the display of the set value on the set value display device 62 is updated.
Specifically, in the set value display update process, first, a subcommand for specifying a value (set value after change) set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In the set value display update processing, next, the same value as the value (set value after change) set in the setting information storage area is set in the set value display counter. Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the set value display device 62, the segment corresponding to the value of the set value display counter is controlled to be lit.
In the present embodiment, the display of the set value on the set value display device 62 is executed only during the period in which the set value change permission condition is satisfied.

In step S29-6, set value change end processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-4).
In the set value change end process, “0” is set in the set value change permission flag area. Also, the value of the set value display counter is initialized (cleared). As a result, all the segments constituting the set value display device 62 are extinguished (the display of the set value on the set value display device 62 ends).

Next, the switch management process in step S4-9 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-9, the process proceeds to step S5-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2. If it is determined that the ON state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, a normal start ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal start ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start opening switch 101 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start opening switch 101 is detected (Yes), If the process proceeds to S5-4 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to Step S5-5.
In step S5-4, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special figure 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has been detected (Yes), If the process proceeds to S5-6 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (Step S4-10). To do.
In step S5-6, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). The special figure 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.

Next, the general-purpose starting ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose starting ball detection process.
When the normal starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 11, first, the process proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, a regular random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal random number acquisition process, a random number (random value) is acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is an upper limit value (in this embodiment, “1”), and it is determined that the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is not the upper limit value. In (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and when it is determined that the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5- Move to 3).
In step S6-3, a general-purpose pending number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the usual figure pending number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the usual figure pending number counter is newly set in the usual figure pending number counter.
In step S6-4, a regular random number storage process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the usual random number saving process, the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the usual figure starting information storage area of the RAM 230 as ordinary figure starting information.

Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 12, first, the process proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. Also, “1” is added to the value of the external information start opening ball entry counter.
In step S7-2, a holding number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the holding number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 1 holding number counter is set in the holding number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, as shown in FIG. 13, first, the process proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. Also, “1” is added to the value of the external information start opening ball entry counter.
In step S8-2, a holding number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the holding number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 2 holding number counter is set in the holding number counter address area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 14, first, the process proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special figure hold number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure hold number acquisition process, the value of the special figure hold number counter (see Fig. 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area (see Fig. 1 hold) Number or special figure 2 hold number) is acquired (loaded).

In step S9-3, a special figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special figure random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random values) such as a big hit random number, a winning design random number, a reach group random number, a reach mode random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether or not the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) acquired in step S9-2 is an upper limit value ("4" in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the special figure hold number is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5. If it is determined that the special figure hold number is the upper limit value (Yes), a series of processes is performed. And the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10 or S5-5).
In step S9-5, a special figure holding number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure hold number counter update process, the value set in the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area A value obtained by adding “1” to is newly set in the special figure holding number counter.

In step S9-6, a special figure random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storage process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as special figure start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) as a special figure start information storage area (special figure 1 start). Information storage area or special figure 2 start information storage area).
Specifically, the RAM 230 stores a changing start information storage area in which start information during execution of special symbol notification display is stored, and a special figure 1 start information in which start determination is suspended. It includes a start information storage area and a special figure 2 start information storage area where start determination is suspended.
The special figure 1 start information storage area includes a first storage part to a fourth storage part as a storage part capable of storing the special figure 1 start information. Different priority orders are defined in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. That is, the priority order of each storage unit is defined to be the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit (upper order → lower order) in descending order of priority. . The special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is subjected to start determination in order from the special figure 1 start information stored in the higher priority storage unit.
The special figure 2 start information storage area includes a first storage part to a fourth storage part as a storage part capable of storing the special figure 2 start information. Different priority orders are defined in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. That is, the priority order of each storage unit is defined to be the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit (upper order → lower order) in descending order of priority. . And the special figure 2 starting information memorize | stored in the special figure 2 starting information storage area performs starting determination in an order from the special figure 2 starting information memorize | stored in the memory | storage part with a high priority.

If the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special diagram 1 start information. 1 Store in the start information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the highest priority storage unit among the free storage units. Specifically, when the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = “1”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the first storage unit. On the other hand, if the current value of the special figure 1 holding number counter = “2”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the second storage unit. If the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = “3”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the third storage unit. If the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = “4”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the fourth storage unit.
On the other hand, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special diagram 2 starting information. 2 Store in the start information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the highest priority storage unit among the free storage units. Specifically, when the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = “1”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the first storage unit. On the other hand, if the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = “2”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the second storage unit. If the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = “3”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the third storage unit. When the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = “4”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the fourth storage unit.

  In step S9-7, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the hold number designation command setting process, a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure hold number (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) has increased by “1” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the number-of-holds designation command for designating that the number of special symbol 1 reservations has increased by "1" Is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, and if the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the reservation number designation command for designating that the special figure 2 reservation number has increased by "1" is stored in the RAM 230. Is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S9-8, a pre-determination process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10 or S5-5). In the pre-determination process, the start information (the special figure 1 start information or the special figure) saved (stored) in the special figure start information storage area (the special figure 1 start information storage area or the special figure 2 start information storage area) in step S9-6. (2 start information) (hereinafter referred to as “preliminary determination start information”), various lottery results are determined in advance.
In this embodiment, pre-determination of various lottery results is executed for all start information (Special Figure 1 start information and Special Figure 2 start information).
Note that the start information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state may be configured such that prior determination of various lottery results is not executed. In addition, for the special figure 2 start information acquired (stored) during stoppage of the time reduction control, the advance determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 start information acquired (stored) during execution of the time reduction control. As for, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In the preliminary determination process, first, a preliminary special figure winning determination process is executed.
In the special special symbol winning determination process, a special symbol lottery result (“big hit” or “miss”) is determined (preliminary special symbol winning determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol winning lottery table in which special bonus lottery values are registered. In addition, the special figure winning lottery table corresponds to each combination of a set value ("1" to "6") and a gaming state ("special figure low probability state" or "special figure high probability state"). The special figure winning lottery table is stored.
Specifically, as the special figure winning lottery table, “setting value 1 low-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “setting value 1 high-accuracy special drawing winning lottery table”, and “setting value 2 low-probability special lottery table”. "Figure winning lottery table", "Set value 2 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "Set value 3 low accuracy special figure winning lottery table" and "Set value 3 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table" “Set value 4 low-accuracy special map winning lottery table”, “Set value 4 high-accuracy special map winning lottery table”, “Set value 5 low-accuracy special map winning lottery table”, “Setting value A “5 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, a “set value 6 low-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, and a “set value 6 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table” are stored.

In the “set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “1” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “204” are registered as big hit values.
In the “set value 1 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “1” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state”) Selected). In the “set value 1 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2039” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “2” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “209” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 2 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “2” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of the “special figure high probability state”) Selected). In the “set value 2 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2089” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “3” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “214” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 3 high probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “3” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Selected). In the “set value 3 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2139” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.

In the “set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “4” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “219” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 4 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “4” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Selected). In the “set value 4 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2189” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “5” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “224” are registered as big hit values.
In the “set value 5 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “5” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Selected). In the “set value 5 high-precision special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2239” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 6 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “6” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “229” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 6 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “6” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state”) Selected). In the “set value 6 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2289” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.

In the special special chart winning determination process, the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area and the current gaming state ("high special figure probability state" or "special figure low probability state") are confirmed. The special figure winning lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read special symbol winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is “big hit” (preliminary special symbol winning determination). .
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the read special symbol winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is set to “big hit” (Winning) is determined.
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-judgment start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table (if it matches the outlier value), the special symbol The result of the lottery is determined as “out of” (decision).

In the preliminary determination process, a preliminary special figure stop symbol determination process is executed next. In the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, the special symbol stop symbol type is determined (pre-special symbol stop symbol determination).
In the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, if it is determined that “big hit” (winning) is determined by the pre-special symbol winning determination, the type of “big hit symbol” is determined (pre-special symbol stop symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the hit symbol random number and the type of “hit symbol” is registered. In addition, as the jackpot symbol lottery table, a first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored.
In the first jackpot symbol lottery table, “one jackpot symbol” and “two jackpot symbols” are registered as the type of “hit symbol”. On the other hand, in the second big hit symbol lottery table, “big hit three symbols” to “big hit six symbols” are registered as types of “big hit symbols”.
When the pre-determined start information is the special figure 1 start information, the first big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the big hit symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read first big hit symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the preliminary determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, the second big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the big hit symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read second big hit symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the special special symbol stop symbol determination process, if it is determined to be “out” (decision) by the preliminary special symbol winning determination, “exclusion symbol” is determined as the stop symbol type (pre-special symbol stop symbol determination) )

Next, in the pre-determination process, a first prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the first prefetch designation command setting process, the first prefetch designation command for designating the type of the stop symbol determined by the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the pre-determination process, a pre-special drawing variation mode determination process is then executed.
At this time, when it is determined as “big hit” (winning) by the pre-special drawing winning determination, a pre-special drawing fluctuation mode determining process described later is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined as “out of” (decision) by the prior special figure winning determination, the pre-specialized figure variation state determination process at the time of loss described later is executed.

In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, first, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined (pre-variation mode determination at the time of winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning-time variation mode determination table in which the correspondence between the reach mode random number and the variation mode type (variation mode number) is registered.
In addition, the winning mode variation mode determination table includes the type of jackpot symbol ("one jackpot symbol" to "six jackpot symbols"), the gaming state ("special symbol high probability state" or "special symbol low probability state"), hourly counter And the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to the combination of the value and the like.
In the present embodiment, the types of fluctuation modes (variation mode numbers) are defined as “no pseudo-continuous fluctuation”, “pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation”, “pseudo-continuous 3 fluctuation”, and “pseudo-continuous 4 fluctuation”. Has been.
In addition, a plurality of variation modes (variation mode numbers) associated with different variation times are defined as the variation modes (variation mode numbers) belonging to the “pseudo-continuous variation”.
The jackpot expectation of each type is the category belonging to “pseudo-continuous 4 variation”, “pseudo-continuous 3 variation”, “pseudo-continuous 2 variation”, and “pseudo-continuous variation” in descending order of the jackpot expectation. It is specified that the degree of high hits → low expectation of big hits).
The “big hit expectation” refers to the possibility (degree) of occurrence of a big hit gaming state when the content (variation mode type, fluctuation pattern type, production mode, etc.) is selected.

In each winning variation mode determination table, “pseudo-continuous 2 variation”, “pseudo-continuous 3 variation”, and “pseudo-continuous 4 variation” are registered as the variation mode type (variation mode number). ("Fluctuation without pseudo-ream" is not registered).
In the pre-variation mode determination at the time of winning, first, the type of jackpot symbol determined by the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination and the gaming state are confirmed, and the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read variation mode determination table at the time of winning.

In the pre-special drawing variation mode determination process at the time of winning, next, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern is determined (pre-variation pattern determination at the time of winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation pattern determination table in which a correspondence between a variation pattern random number and a variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is registered.
In addition, as the winning variation pattern determination table, the type of jackpot symbol ("one jackpot symbol" to "six jackpot symbols"), the game state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state", hourly counter And the winning variation pattern determination table corresponding to the combination of the variation mode type and the type of variation mode.
In the present embodiment, “variation without reach”, “normal reach variation”, and “super reach variation” are defined as types of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers).
In addition, a plurality of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) associated with different variation times are defined as variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to “unreachable variation”.
A plurality of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) associated with different variation times are defined as variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to “normal reach variation”.
A plurality of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) associated with different variation times are defined as variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to “super reach variation”. In the present embodiment, “super reach variation 1” to “super reach variation 5” are defined as variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to “super reach variation”.
The expectation level of each type is defined to be “super-reach fluctuation”, “normal reach fluctuation”, and “non-reach fluctuation” (high expectation → low expectation) in descending order of expectation.
In addition, the expectation level of each fluctuation pattern belonging to “super reach fluctuation” is “super reach fluctuation 5”, “super reach fluctuation 4”, “super reach fluctuation 3”, “super reach fluctuation” in descending order of expectation. 2 ”,“ Super Reach Variation 1 ”(High Expectation → Low Expectation).

In each winning variation pattern determination table, “normal reach variation” and “super reach variation” are registered as variation pattern types (variation pattern numbers) (“reach-less variation” is not registered). ).
In the pre-variation pattern determination at the time of winning, first, the type of jackpot symbol determined by the prior special figure stop symbol determination, the gaming state, and the type of variation mode (variation mode number) determined by the pre-variation mode determination at the time of winning , And the winning variation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

On the other hand, in the prior special figure variation mode determination process at the time of loss, first, the type of reach group random number (“indefinite value” or “fixed value”) included in the pre-determination start information is determined (pre-random number type determination).
In the present embodiment, “undefined value” and “fixed value” are defined as the types of reach group random numbers.
“Undefined value” means that when starting information (Special Figure 1 starting information or Special Figure 2 starting information) is acquired (stored), the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) and the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined. It is not changed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display based on the start information (when executing step S11-7) based on the number of holdings at that time (number of holdings of special figure 1 or special figure 2) The type of mode (variation mode number) and the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined.
“Fixed value” means acquisition of start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) regardless of the number of holdings at the start of special symbol fluctuation display (when step S11-7 is executed). At the time of storage (when step S9-8 is executed), the type of variation mode (variation mode number) and the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined.
In the present embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated within the range of “0” to “10006”. Of “0” to “10006”, “0” to “8499” are “indefinite values”, and “8500” to “10006” are “fixed values”.
Therefore, in the prior random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination start information is less than “8500”, it is determined as “undefined value”, and the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination start information is determined. When the value is “8500” or more, it is determined as “fixed value”.

In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, when it is determined as “fixed value” by the pre-random number type determination, the prior reach group determination, the pre-variation mode determination at the time of defeat, and the pre-variation pattern determination at the time of defeat And execute.
In addition, in the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of loss, if it is determined as “undefined value” by the prior random type determination, the advance reach group determination, the advance variation mode determination at the time of loss, and the fluctuation pattern determination at the time of loss , Is not executed.

In the advance reach group determination, the type of reach group (reach group number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which correspondences between reach mode random numbers and reach group types (reach group numbers) are registered.
In addition, an indefinite value reach group determination table and a fixed value reach group determination table are stored as the reach group determination table.
In this embodiment, “reach group 1”, “reach group 2”, and “reach group 3” are defined as the types of reach groups.
In the indefinite value reach group determination table, only “reach group 1” is registered as the reach group type (“reach group 2” and “reach group 3” are not registered).
On the other hand, in the fixed value reach group determination table, only “reach group 2” and “reach group 3” are registered as the reach group type (“reach group 1” is not registered).
In the advance reach group determination, the fixed value reach group determination table is read. Then, the type of reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read fixed value reach group determination table.

In the pre-change mode determination at the time of loss, the type of change mode (change mode number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a selection mode change mode determination table in which correspondence between the reach mode random number and the change mode type (change mode number) is registered.
Furthermore, as the loss mode fluctuation mode determination table, “loss mode change mode determination table 1” corresponding to “reach group 1”, “failure change mode determination table 2” corresponding to “reach group 2”, and “reach” “Disappointment variation mode determination table 3” corresponding to “Group 3” is stored.
In addition, as the “Disappointing Fluctuation Mode Determination Table 1”, it corresponds to each combination of the number of holds (Special figure 1 hold number or Special figure 2 hold number) and the execution status (running or stopped) of the time-saving control. The “decision change mode determination table 1” is stored.

In the “decision fluctuation mode determination table 1”, only “variation without pseudo-continuous variation” is registered as the type of variation mode (variation mode number) (“quasi-continuous variation 2”, “pseudo-continuous variation 3”). "And" Pseudo-ream 4 variation "are not registered).
Further, the contents of the “decision variable mode determination table 1” corresponding to each number of holds are set so that the type of change mode (change mode number) associated with a short change time is selected as the number of holds increases. Yes.
In the “decided fluctuation mode determination table 2”, the types of fluctuation modes (fluctuation mode numbers) are registered as “pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation”, “pseudo continuous 3 fluctuation”, and “pseudo continuous 4 fluctuation”. ("Fluctuation without quasi-ream" is not registered).
In the “decision fluctuation mode determination table 3”, the types of fluctuation modes (fluctuation mode numbers) are registered as “pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation”, “pseudo continuous 3 fluctuation”, and “pseudo continuous 4 fluctuation”. ("Fluctuation without quasi-ream" is not registered).

In the pre-variation mode determination at the time of loss, first, the type of reach group determined by the pre-reach group determination is confirmed, and a loss mode variable mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read variation mode determination table at the time of loss.

In the prior variation pattern determination at the time of loss, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a variation pattern determination table at the time of selection, in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is registered.
Further, as the change pattern determination table at the time of loss, “change pattern determination table 1 at the time of loss” corresponding to “reach group 1”, “change pattern determination table 2 at time of loss” corresponding to “reach group 2”, and “reach” “Decision change variation pattern determination table 3” corresponding to “Group 3” is stored.
In addition, as the “decision change pattern determination table 1”, it corresponds to each combination of the number of holdings (the number of holdings of special figure 1 or the number of holdings of special figure 2) and the execution status of time reduction control (running or stopped) The “decision change pattern determination table 1” is stored.

In the “decision change variation pattern determination table 1”, only “variation without reach” is registered as the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) (“normal reach variation” and “super reach variation” are registered). Not)
Further, the contents of the “decision change pattern determination table 1” corresponding to each number of holds are set so that the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) associated with a short variation time is selected as the number of suspensions increases. Yes.
Only “normal reach fluctuation” and “super reach fluctuation” and “super reach fluctuation” are not registered as the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) in the “decision fluctuation pattern determination table 2”. ).
Only “super reach variation” and “normal reach variation” are not registered as the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) in the “decision variation pattern determination table 3”. ).

In the pre-change pattern determination at the time of loss, first, the type of reach group determined by the pre-reach group determination is confirmed, and the change pattern determination table at the time of loss corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

Next, in the pre-determination process, second and third prefetch designation command setting processes are executed.
In the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processing, if it is determined as “big hit” (winning) by the pre-special drawing win determination, the type of the fluctuation mode (variation mode number) determined by the pre-variation mode determination at the time of winning ) And a third prefetch designation command for designating the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) determined by the pre-variation pattern determination at the time of winning are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “out of” (decision) by the prior special figure winning determination and “fixed value” is determined by the prior random number type determination, the variation mode determined by the prior variation mode determination at the time of defeat is determined. A sub-command of the RAM 230 includes a second look-ahead designation command for designating the type (variation mode number), a second look-ahead designation command for designating the type of the variation pattern (variation pattern number) determined by the pre-variation pattern determination at the time of loss. Store in the output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined as “out of” (decision) by the prior special figure winning determination, and “indefinite value” is determined by the prior random type determination, a second look-ahead specifying command for specifying “indefinite value”; , The third prefetching designation command for designating “undefined value” and the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 are stored.

As described above, when the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination start information is “fixed value”, the variation mode type (variation mode number) and the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) are determined, Second and third prefetch designation commands for designating the determined variation mode type and variation pattern type are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.
On the other hand, when the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination start information is “undefined value”, the variation mode type (variation mode number) and the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) are not determined. , Second and third prefetching designation commands for designating “indefinite value” are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.

Next, the special game management process in step S4-11 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In this embodiment, as a stage / stage (hereinafter referred to as “special game phase”) of a game (hereinafter referred to as “special game”) executed based on a special symbol lottery, `` Special figure changing state '', `` Special figure stop symbol display state '', `` Big prize opening before opening '', `` Big prize opening opening control state '', `` Large winning opening closed effective state '' and `` Large winning opening closed '' Seven "wait states" are defined.
A value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven special game phases is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
The ROM 220 stores special game control modules corresponding to each special game phase as special game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games.
In the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-11, the process first proceeds to step S10-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S10-1, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the “special figure change waiting state”, a special figure change waiting process described later is started, and the “special figure change waiting state” is started. In the case of a value corresponding to, a special figure changing process to be described later is started, and in the case of a value corresponding to "special figure stop symbol display state", a special figure stopping process to be described later is started, When the value corresponds to “a state before opening the big prize opening”, a process for pre-opening a big prize opening, which will be described later, is started. When the value of the big prize opening control process is started and the value corresponds to the “big prize opening closing valid state”, the big prize opening closing effective process described later is started, and the “big prize opening completion wait state” is entered. If the value is a corresponding value, a special winning opening opening wait process described later is performed. It is started.

Next, the special figure variation waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation waiting process.
When the special figure variation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 16, first, the process proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “1” or more, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not “1” or more (No). Shifts to step S11-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “1” or more (Yes), shifts to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is “1” or more, and it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is “1” or more (Yes). In step S11-3, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 holding number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (Yes), the series of processing is terminated and the next processing (step S4-12) is performed. ).

In step S11-3, a special figure hold number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure hold number update process, the special figure hold number (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure hold number update process, first, the start information (special figure 1 start) stored in the start information storage area (the special figure 1 start information storage area and the special figure 2 start information storage area) of the RAM 230. Information and special figure 2 start information) is selected as determination start information.
In this embodiment, the start determination for the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is given priority over the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area. (Special figure winning judgment, special figure stop symbol judgment, special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) are executed.
Accordingly, when one or more special figure 2 start information is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the first of the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. Obtained (stored) is selected as determination start information. That is, the special figure 2 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 start information is not stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is first acquired (stored). ) Is selected as determination start information. That is, the special figure 1 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.
Next, the value of the special figure hold number counter (the special figure 1 hold number counter or the special figure 2 hold number counter) is updated.
Specifically, when the special figure 1 start information is set as the determination start information, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly added to the special figure 1 hold number. Set to counter.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 start information is determined start information, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly set in the special figure 2 hold number counter. To do.
Next, the determination start information storage area is changed (shifted) from the start information storage area (the special figure 1 start information storage area or the special figure 2 start information storage area) to the changing start information storage area.
Specifically, when the special figure 2 start information is determined start information, the special figure 2 start information (determination start information) stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area is Store (shift) in the starting information storage area during fluctuation. Further, when the special figure 2 start information is stored in the second storage part to the fourth storage part of the special figure 2 start information storage area, the special figure 2 start information stored in each storage part is The data is stored (shifted) in the storage unit that has a higher priority than the storage unit.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 start information is determined start information, the special figure 1 start information (determination start information) stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area is used as the start during fluctuation. Store (shift) in the information storage area. In addition, when the special figure 1 start information is stored in the second storage part to the fourth storage part of the special figure 1 start information storage area, the special figure 1 start information stored in each storage part is The data is stored (shifted) in the storage unit that has a higher priority than the storage unit.

In step S11-4, special figure winning determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the special symbol winning determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special symbol winning determination).
In the special figure winning determination process, the value set in the setting information storage area (setting value) and the current gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state") are confirmed. Then, the special drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the determination start information and the read special symbol winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is “big hit” (special symbol winning determination).
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the read special symbol winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is set to “big hit” ( It is determined that (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the judgment start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table (if it matches the outlier value), the special symbol lottery The result is determined as “out of” (decision).

In step S11-5, a special figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6.
In the special figure stop symbol determination process, first, the type of stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol stop symbol determination).
In other words, if it is determined that “big hit” (winning) is determined by the special symbol winning determination, the type of “big winning symbol” is determined.
Specifically, when the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, the first big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the read first big hit symbol lottery table, the type of the big hit symbol is determined.
On the other hand, when the judgment start information is the special figure 2 start information, the second big hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the big hit symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the read second big hit symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “disappearance” (decision) by the special symbol winning determination, “disappearing symbol” is determined as the stop symbol type.

In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, next, a special symbol stop symbol (seg data / stop symbol number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a seg data table in which correspondences between hit symbol random numbers and stop symbols (seg data / stop symbol numbers) are registered.
In addition, as a seg data table, a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) corresponding to the case of winning a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) A lost selection seg data table corresponding to the case of being lost in (design lottery) is stored.
Furthermore, a winning seg data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a winning seg data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored as the winning seg data table.
In order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol, first, the result of the special symbol winning determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined as “big hit” (winning) by the special figure winning determination, the type of determination starting information (special figure 1 starting information or special figure 2 starting information) is further confirmed, and this confirmation result is obtained. Read the corresponding winning seg data table. Then, a stop symbol (seg data / stop symbol number) is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the read winning seg data table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “out of” (decision) by the special figure winning determination, the seg data table at the time of winning is read. Then, the stop symbol (seg data / stop symbol number) is determined on the basis of the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the read-off seg data table.
In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, the determined stop symbol (seg data / stop symbol number) is then stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.

  In step S11-6, a symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command for designating the type of the stop symbol determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-7, special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (variation mode type and variation pattern type) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, a winning special figure fluctuation mode determination process is executed. At this time, when it is determined as “big hit” (winning) by the special figure winning determination, the winning special figure fluctuation mode determining process described later is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined as “disappearance” (decision) by the special figure winning determination, a special figure fluctuation state determination process at the time of winning will be executed.

In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, first, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined (variation mode determination at the time of winning).
In the winning variation mode determination, the type of jackpot symbol determined by the special figure stop symbol determination and the gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state", hourly counter value, etc.), After confirmation, the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read winning variation mode determination table, the variation mode type (variation mode number) is determined.
In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, next, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined (variation pattern determination at the time of winning).
In the winning variation pattern determination, the type of jackpot symbol determined by the special symbol stop symbol determination, the gaming state ("Special figure high probability state" or "Special figure low probability state", the value of the short time counter, etc.), and the winning The type of variation mode (variation mode number) determined by the time variation mode determination is confirmed, and a winning variation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

On the other hand, in the special figure change mode determination process at the time of loss, first, the type (“indefinite value” or “fixed value”) of the reach group random number included in the determination start information is determined (random number type determination).
In the random number type determination, when the reach group random number value included in the determination start information is less than “8500”, it is determined as “undefined value”, and the reach group random number value included in the determination start information is “8500”. When it is above, it is determined as “fixed value”.
In the special figure change mode determination process at the time of loss, next, the type of reach group (reach group number) is determined (reach group determination).
In the reach group determination, when it is determined as “fixed value” by the random number type determination, the fixed value reach group determination table is read. Then, the type of the reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the determination start information and the read fixed value reach group determination table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “indefinite value” by the random number type determination, the indefinite value reach group determination table is read. Then, the type of reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the determination start information and the read indefinite value reach group determination table.
In the special figure change mode determination process at the time of loss, next, the type of change mode (change mode number) is determined (change mode determination at the time of loss).
In the loss mode change mode determination, if it is determined as a “fixed value” by the random number type determination, the reach group type determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the loss mode change mode determination corresponding to this confirmation result Read the table. Then, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read variation mode determination table at the time of loss.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “undefined value” by the random number type determination, the type of the reach group determined by the reach group determination, the number of reservations (the number of special figure 1 or the number of special figure 2), and time reduction control The execution state (during execution or stoppage) is confirmed, and the loss selection variation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read variation mode determination table at the time of loss.
In the special figure change mode determination process at the time of loss, next, the type (change pattern number) of the change pattern is determined (change pattern determination at the time of loss).
In the change pattern determination at the time of loss selection, if it is determined as “fixed value” by the random number type determination, the type of reach group determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the change pattern determination at the time of loss corresponding to this confirmation result Read the table. Then, based on the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read variation pattern determination table at the time of selection, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “undefined value” by the random number type determination, the type of the reach group determined by the reach group determination, the number of reservations (the number of special figure 1 or the number of special figure 2), and time reduction control The execution state (during execution or stoppage) is confirmed, and the loss selection variation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read variation pattern determination table at the time of selection, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined.

In step S11-8, a variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the variation pattern command setting process, a variation mode designation command for designating the variation mode type (variation mode number) determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-9, a special figure variation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special figure variation time setting process, a variation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 1”) corresponding to the variation mode type (variation mode number) determined in step S11-7 is acquired. Also, a variation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 2”) corresponding to the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) determined in step S11-7 is acquired. Then, the total time of the obtained fluctuation time 1 and fluctuation time 2 is calculated. Then, the calculated total time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-10, special figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special figure display timer.
Next, when the judgment start information is the special figure 1 start information, predetermined segment data is set as the segment data corresponding to the special figure 1 display device. Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, when the determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, predetermined segment data is set as the segment data corresponding to the special figure 2 display device. Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-11, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the number-of-holds designation command setting process, a number-of-holds designation command for designating that the number of special figure holds (the number of special figure 1 holds or the number of special figure 2 holds) has decreased by “1” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. At this time, if the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, a pending number designation command designating that the special figure 1 pending number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, If the judgment start information is the special figure 2 start information, a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure 2 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S11-12, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure changing state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special figure changing process.
When the special figure changing process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 17, first, the process proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure display timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- 3, when it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S12-3, a special figure fluctuation display data update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special figure fluctuation display data update processing, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data update process, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the segment data corresponding to the special figure 1 display device is updated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the segment data corresponding to the special symbol 2 display device is updated.

In step S12-4, a special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol (seg data / stop symbol number) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol is terminated, the acquired segment data (or the segment data corresponding to the acquired stop symbol number) is set as the segment data corresponding to the special symbol 1 display device. Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled to be lit (stopped display).
On the other hand, when ending the variable display of the second special symbol, the acquired segment data (or the segment data corresponding to the acquired stop symbol number) is set as the segment data corresponding to the special symbol 2 display device. Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled to be lit (stop display).

In step S12-5, a special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.
In step S12-6, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop designation command setting process, the stop designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is added to the value of the external information determination number counter.
In step S12-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure stop symbol display state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special figure stopping process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special figure stopping process.
When the special figure stopping process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 18, first, the process proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol type is “hit symbol”. If it is determined that the stop symbol type is not “hit symbol” (No), the process proceeds to step S13-3. If it is determined that the stop symbol type is “big hit symbol” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-6.
In step S13-3, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is being executed. If it is determined that the time reduction control is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-4 and the time reduction control is being executed. If not (No), the process proceeds to step S13-5.
Here, when “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined that the time reduction control is being executed, and when “0” is set, execution of the time reduction control is executed. Judge that it is not inside.

In step S13-4, a time reduction control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the time reduction control management process, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is terminated.
Specifically, in the time reduction control management process, first, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value of the time reduction counter is newly set as the value of the time reduction counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (Yes), “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 (time reduction control is stopped). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, the state where “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained (the state where the time reduction control is being executed is maintained). .
In step S13-5, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure change waiting state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-6, a game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. Also, “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-7, special power control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-8. In the special electric combination control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the special electric combination 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores special power control tables corresponding to each type of “big hit symbol”. Each special power control table includes a special winning opening closing time, a special winning opening closing time, the number of round games, the number of opening / closing switching corresponding to each round game, and control data (solenoid) corresponding to each opening / closing switching. Control data, control time data) and the like.
In the special power control data setting process, a special power control table corresponding to the type of “big hit symbol” determined in step S11-5 is read, and the read special power control table is used as the special power control table in the RAM 230. Set to area.
Next, “0” is set in the special electric utility continuous operation number counter.

In step S13-8, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-9. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-9, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command for designating the type of “hit symbol” determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is added to the value of the external information big hit counter.
In step S13-10, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “pre-opening state for big prize opening” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the process for pre-opening the special winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening.
When the big prize opening pre-processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 19, first, the process proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, a special electric combination continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter update process, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter is newly set in the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter.
In step S14-3, a round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, the round start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special power combination opening / closing switching count setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special power combination open / close switching number setting process, the special power combination control table set in the special power combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to read out the number of open / close switching corresponding to the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter. . Then, the read opening / closing switching frequency is set in the special electric utility switching frequency counter.
Next, “0” is set as the value of the special electric winning prize counter.
In step S14-5, a special power combination opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric role opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “big winning opening release control state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special power combination opening / closing switching process of steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special power combination opening / closing switching process.
When the special power combination opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 20, first, the process proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power combination switching frequency counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the special power switching frequency counter is not “0” (No). Moves to step S15-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric power switch on / off switching counter is “0” (Yes), the series of processing ends and the next processing (step S14-6) Alternatively, the process proceeds to S16-4).

In step S15-2, a special power combination control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric combination control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric combination 53a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special power control data setting process, a special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid corresponding to the value of the special power on / off switching counter Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data designating energization or deenergization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. Thereby, the control of the special winning opening solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

In step S15-3, a special power control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special power control time setting process, the special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the control corresponding to the value of the special power on / off switching number counter is performed. Read time. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special power combination opening / closing switching number counter update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric utility switching frequency counter updating process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special electric power switching frequency counter is newly set in the special electric power switching frequency counter.

Next, the special winning opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening control process.
When the big prize opening opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, first, the process proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power combination switching frequency counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the special power switching frequency counter is not “0” (No). The process proceeds to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric power switching on / off counter is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special power combination opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 20) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power prize winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [ball] in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning prize counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, a special winning opening opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the special winning opening opening control end process, solenoid control data for designating the energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to be closed.
In step S16-6, a special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special winning opening closing time setting process, the special winning combination closing effective time (interval time) is obtained by referring to the special electric control table set in the special electric control table area of the RAM 230, and the special game timer. Set to.
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, the round end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “big winning opening closed effective state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special winning opening closing effective process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening closing effective process.
When the big prize opening closing effective process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the process proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter has reached a specified value, and when it is determined that the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No ), The process proceeds to step S17-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric power continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, referring to the special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games specified in the special power control table is acquired as a specified value to make a determination. .
In step S17-3, a special winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, a special big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric winning control table set in the special electric winning control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-4, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “pre-opening state for big prize opening” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a special ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to a special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending designation command setting process, the ending designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “big winning opening free end wait state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special winning opening free weighting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening free weighting process.
When the big prize opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 23, first, the process proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S18-2, a game state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, the value of the special figure high probability state flag in the RAM 230 is set according to the type of the stop symbol (big hit symbol).
At this time, when the type of the stop symbol is “one jackpot symbol” or “three jackpot symbol” to “5 jackpot symbol”, “1” is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, when the stop symbol type is “2 jackpot symbols” or “6 jackpot symbols”, “0” is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a predetermined number of time reductions is set in the time reduction counter. At this time, if the type of the stop symbol is “2 jackpot symbols” or “6 jackpot symbols”, 100 [times] is set as the predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol is “one jackpot symbol” or “three jackpot symbol” to “5 jackpot symbol”, 10000 [times] is set as the predetermined number of times. Also, “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol is set in the previous jackpot symbol flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure change waiting state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal game management process in step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
Here, in the present embodiment, as a stage / stage (hereinafter referred to as “normal game phase”) of a game (hereinafter referred to as “normal game phase”) executed based on the normal symbol lottery, `` Status '', `` Normal diagram changing status '', `` Normal diagram stop symbol display status '', `` Multi-plan electric accessory release state '', `` Multi-plan electric accessory release control status '', `` Multi-plan electric feature closure enabled Seven states are defined: "state" and "usually waiting state for opening an electric utility article".
Then, a value (ordinary game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
The ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
In the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-12, the process first proceeds to step S19-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S19-1, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value acquired in step S19-1 (normal game phase) is read.
In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game control module execution process, a process based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the “normal state change waiting state”, the normal state change waiting process described later is started, and the “normal state change state” is started. In the case of a value corresponding to, the process of changing the normal map described later is started, and in the case of the value corresponding to the “general map stop symbol display state”, the process of stopping the normal map described later is started, When it is a value corresponding to “a state before opening of an ordinary electric accessory”, a normal electric accessory opening pre-processing described later is started, and when it is a value corresponding to “an ordinary electric accessory opening control state”. When the normal electric actor release control process to be described later is started and the value corresponds to the “normal electric actor closing effective state”, the normal electric actor closing effective process to be described later is started, If the value corresponds to the `` object release end wait state '', Electric won game open end wait process is started.

Next, the process of waiting for a change in the normal map executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the normal variation waiting process.
When the normal variation waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 25, first, the process proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the pending map counter is “1” or more, and if it is determined that the value of the pending map counter is “1” or more (Yes). , The process proceeds to step S20-2, and if it is determined that the value of the general-purpose pending number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). To do.
In step S20-2, a general-purpose hold number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the general figure hold number update process, the general figure hold number is updated.
Specifically, in the normal figure reservation number update process, one start information among the general figure start information stored in the normal start information storage area of the RAM 230 is selected as determination start information.
In the present embodiment, the universal chart start information acquired (stored) first among the general chart start information stored in the general chart start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.

In step S20-3, a normal winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal figure winning determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (normal figure winning determination).
The ROM 220 stores a common symbol winning lottery table in which the winning symbol of the normal symbol lottery is registered. In addition, as a common figure winning lottery table, a common figure winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time reduction control and a common figure winning lottery table corresponding to the stoppage of the time reduction control are stored.
In the common-place winning lottery table corresponding to the stoppage of the short-time control, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability is the first probability (1/99 in this embodiment). On the other hand, the win value is registered so that the winning probability is a second probability (1/1 in the present embodiment) higher than the first probability in the common figure winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the short-time control. ing.
Then, in the normal figure winning determination process, the normal figure winning lottery table is determined based on the winning random number included in the determination start information and the normal figure winning lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (execution or stoppage). Make a decision.
Specifically, when the value of the winning random number included in the determination start information matches the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as “winning” (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number included in the determination start information does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be “out” (losing).

In step S20-4, a common figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the general symbol stop symbol determination process, the stop symbol type (stop symbol number) of the normal symbol is determined (normal symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the general symbol stop symbol determination process, if it is determined to be “winning” (winning) by the common symbol winning determination, “stop per symbol” is set as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). judge.
On the other hand, if it is determined as “out of” (decision) by the normal symbol winning determination, “out of symbol” is determined as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, a normal fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal pattern variation pattern determination process, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map variation pattern determination process, when the time reduction control is stopped, the first type (2.0 in this embodiment) is set as the type of the general map variation pattern (variation pattern number). The type corresponding to the variation time of [s] is determined.
On the other hand, when the time-shortening control is being executed, the second type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is used as the type of the normal fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number). Determine.

In step S20-6, a normal time change time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the usual map fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type of the usual figure fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is acquired. And the acquired fluctuation | variation time is set to a normal game timer.
In step S20-7, a map change display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general map display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal map display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the general map display timer.
Next, predetermined segment data is set as segment data corresponding to the common map display device. As a result, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled to be lit out of the predetermined number of segments constituting the general-purpose display device.
In step S20-8, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update processing, a value corresponding to the “normal state changing state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the process during normal map change executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process during normal map change.
When the normal map change process is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S21-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the common map display timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is “0” (Yes), step S21− If it is determined that the value of the common chart display timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S21-3, a normal map display data update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the general map display data update process, data for controlling the variable display of the general map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the general map change display data update process, the segment data corresponding to the general map display device is updated.

In step S21-4, a normal stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the general map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the general symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol (seg data) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired segment data (segment data related to the stop symbol) is set as segment data corresponding to the general-purpose display device. As a result, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled to be turned on (stopped display) among a predetermined number of segments constituting the general-purpose display device.
In step S21-5, a normal stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the usual stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal game stop symbol display state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the routine stoppage process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing processing during a normal stoppage.
When the normal map stop process is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S22-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is “per symbol”. If it is determined that the stop symbol is not “per symbol” (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. If it is determined that the stop symbol is “per symbol” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal state waiting state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-4, normal electric control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric combination control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the ordinary electric combination 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal power control table corresponding to the execution status (during execution or stoppage) of the time reduction control. Each ordinary power control table includes a time before opening a normal power, a normal power service closing effective time, an opening end wait time, the number of opening / closing switching, and control data corresponding to each opening / closing switching (solenoid control data, control time). Data).
In the normal power control data setting process, the normal power control table corresponding to the execution status (running or stopped) of the short-time control is read, and the read normal power control table is stored in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230. Set.
Next, the number of times of opening / closing switching is read with reference to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read opening / closing switching frequency is set in the normal electric utility switching frequency counter. Also, “0” is set as the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter.

In step S22-5, a normal power combination opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal power combination opening time setting process, a predetermined normal power combination release time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “state before the normal electric game object is released” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the process for releasing the ordinary electric accessory.
When the normal electric accessory release pre-processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 28, first, the process proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S23-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S23-2, a normal power combination opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal power combination opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “ordinary electric accessory release control state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric combination opening / closing switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the normal power combination opening / closing switching process.
When the ordinary power combination opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, the process first proceeds to step S24-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is not “0” (No). Shifts to step S24-2, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric utility opening / closing switching number counter is “0” (Yes), the series of processing is terminated and the next processing (step S23-3) is performed. Alternatively, the process proceeds to S25-4).
In step S24-2, a normal electronic combination control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the ordinary electric combination control data setting process, control data for controlling the ordinary electric combination 52a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal power combination control data setting process, the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal power combination open / close switching counter is referred to by referring to the normal power combination control table set in the normal power combination control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data designating energization or deenergization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the ordinary electric accessory 52a is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

In step S24-3, a normal power combination control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal power combination control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the normal power combination open / close switching counter is referred to with reference to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230. Read time. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is newly set in the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory release control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory release control process.
When the normal electric accessory release control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the process proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is not “0” (No). The process proceeds to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary power combination switching number counter is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, a normal power combination opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 29) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter reaches a predetermined upper limit (3 [ball] in the present embodiment), and the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is predetermined. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electronic winning prize counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).

In step S25-5, a normal electric utility release control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal power combination release control end process, solenoid control data for designating the energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is controlled to be closed.
In step S25-6, normal electric utility closing effective time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal power combination closing valid time setting process, a normal power combination closing effective time is set in the normal game timer by referring to the normal power combination control table set in the normal power combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal electric accessory closing valid state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric accessory closing effective process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory closing effective process.
When the normal electric accessory closing effective process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 31, first, the process proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S26-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S26-2, an opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, a predetermined opening end wait time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power combination control table set in the normal power combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S26-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “ordinary electric accessory release end wait state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening end weight process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory release end weight process.
When the ordinary electric accessory release end weight process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 32, first, the process proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S27-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S27-2, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal state waiting state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-19 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61. That is, the performance display device control process is a process based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during the execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-19, the process proceeds to step S28-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S28-1, stack pointer saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-2. In the stack pointer saving process, the value of the stack pointer used in the processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 is saved in the RAM saving area.
In step S28-2, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In the register saving process, the register value used in the processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 is saved in the RAM saving area.
In step S28-3, a ball number addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4.
In the ball number addition process, the value stored in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230 is added to the value of the out ball number counter.
Next, the value stored in the payout amount addition value storage area of the RAM 230 is added to the value of the payout number counter.
In step S28-4, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-5. The base ratio calculation process will be described later.

In step S28-5, a performance display device display process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-6. In the performance display device display process, the performance display device 61 sets control data for displaying the base ratio.
Specifically, in the performance display device display process, in the performance display device data signal control data setting area, the base ratio calculated in step S38-4 (the current base ratio in the current section) or step S38-2. The performance display device data signal control data corresponding to the base ratio (final base ratio of the previous section) stored in (1) is set.
Thus, according to the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area, in the performance display device 61, the current base ratio of the current section or the final section of the previous section The base ratio is displayed.
At this time, in the performance display device 61, the current base ratio of the current section and the final base ratio of the previous section are alternately displayed every predetermined time so that the current base ratio of the current section is displayed. The performance display device data signal control data corresponding to the base ratio and the performance display device data signal control data corresponding to the final base ratio of the previous section are alternately set every predetermined time.

In step S28-6, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-7. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S28-2 (the value of the register used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
In step S28-7, stack pointer return processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step S4-20). In the stack pointer restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in step S28-1 (the value of the stack pointer used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.

Next, the base ratio calculation process in step S28-4 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the base ratio calculation process.
The base ratio calculation process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61. That is, the base ratio calculation process is a process based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The base ratio calculation process is called during execution of the performance display device control process.
When the base ratio calculation process is called in step S28-4, as shown in FIG. 34, the process proceeds to step S38-1.
In step S38-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the out ball counter has reached the reference value. If it is determined that the value of the out ball counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38 is performed. -2 and if it is determined that the value of the out ball counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In this embodiment, the reference value = 60000 × n (n = integer). “N” is a value indicating the current section, and “1” is set as an initial value.
In step S38-2, a base ratio storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-3. In the base ratio storage process, the base ratio calculated in the previous base ratio calculation process (step S38-4) is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 as the final base ratio of the previous section. Also, the value of the payout counter is reset (“0” is set as the payout counter value).
In step S38-3, a reference value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4. In the reference value update process, “1” is added to the value (n) indicating the current section. Thereby, the reference value is updated.
In step S38-4, a base ratio calculation process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-5). In the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the out-ball number counter and the value of the payout number counter.

(Various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects performed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

(Holding production)
First, a hold effect (hold display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, each start information (the special figure 1 start information or the special figure 2 start information) stored in the start information storage area (the special figure 1 start information storage area and the special figure 2 start information storage area) is targeted. The hold effect is executed.
The holding effect is that a special symbol notification display (starting determination) based on the start information (hereinafter referred to as “holding effect target start information”) that is the target of the holding effect is held, or the holding effect. It is an effect that suggests (notifies) that a special symbol notification display based on the target start information is being executed.
In the hold effect, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 to b3.

Specifically, in the reserved symbol display area b2, as the display position (display unit) where the reserved symbol h is displayed, four storage units (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the special figure 1 start information storage region ) Is specified for each display position.
In the reserved symbol display area b3, each of the four storage units (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the special figure 2 start information storage region is used as a display position (display unit) where the reserved symbol h is displayed. The display position corresponding to is defined.
And in the hold effect which uses the special figure 1 start information as the target hold effect target start information, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b2.

That is, during the period in which the hold production target start information is stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area (the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) (after acquisition of the hold production target start information, During the period before the start determination based on), the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b2.
At this time, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) in which the hold effect target start information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period in which the hold production target start information is stored in the changing start information storage area (after the start determination based on the hold production target start information is executed, the special symbol notification display based on the hold production target start information ends. In the period up to), the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b1.
On the other hand, in the hold effect using the special figure 2 start information as the hold effect target start information, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b3.
That is, during the period in which the hold production target start information is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area (the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) (after acquisition of the hold production target start information, During the period before the start determination based on), the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b3.
At this time, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) in which the hold effect target start information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period in which the hold production target start information is stored in the changing start information storage area (after the start determination based on the hold production target start information is executed, the special symbol notification display based on the hold production target start information ends. In the period up to), the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b1.

For example, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored as special figure 1 start information in the third storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area, and a holding effect for the special figure 1 start information is provided. When executed, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit of the hold symbol display area b2 in response to the start of the hold effect.
Thereafter, the display area of the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information in response to the storage area storing the hold effect target start information being changed (shifted) from the third storage unit to the second storage unit. However, the display position corresponding to the third storage unit is changed (shifted) to the display position corresponding to the second storage unit.
In addition, when the storage area for storing the hold effect target start information is changed (shifted) from the second storage unit to the first storage unit, the display area of the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information However, the display position corresponding to the second storage unit is changed (shifted) to the display position corresponding to the first storage unit.
Furthermore, the storage area for storing the hold production target start information is changed (shifted) from the special figure 1 start information storage area (first storage unit) to the changing start information storage area. The display area of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the start information is changed (shifted) from the reserved symbol display area b2 (display position corresponding to the first storage unit) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
Then, in response to the end of the special symbol notification display based on the hold effect target start information, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information in the hold symbol display area b1 is ended, whereby the hold effect ends. To do.

In the present embodiment, a normal hold effect and a hold notice effect are defined as the types of hold effects.
“Normal hold effect” is a type of hold effect that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the hold effect target start information.
In the present embodiment, normal hold and special hold are defined as the type (mode) of the hold symbol h.
In the normal hold effect, the normal hold is displayed as the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information.
In the normal hold effect, the hold effect target start information (Special Figure 1 start information or Special Figure 2 start information) is stored in the start information storage area (Special Figure 1 start information storage area or Special Figure 2 start information storage area). Is started in response to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the hold production target start information.

(Pending notice effect)
The “pending notice effect” is a kind of prefetch notice effect. That is, the hold notice effect is a type of hold effect that suggests the result of the prior determination (step S9-8) based on the predetermined start information by the form of the hold symbol h corresponding to the start information.
In the following description, the start information that is the target of the hold notice effect is referred to as “hold notice target start information”. Further, the holding symbol h corresponding to the holding notice target start information is referred to as “notifying target holding symbol hy”.
In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is an effect that suggests a result of pre-special symbol stop symbol determination based on the hold notice target start information (specifically, a possibility of being a “hit symbol”).
Note that the hold notice effect may suggest a result of the prior special figure fluctuation pattern determination based on the hold notice target start information (specifically, there is a possibility of “super reach fluctuation”).
In the hold notice effect, special hold is displayed as the notice target hold symbol hy.
In the present embodiment, “blue hold”, “green hold”, “purple hold”, and “red hold” are defined as special hold modes (types).
Then, in the hold notice effect, the aspect of the notice target hold symbol hy changes, and the result of the prior determination based on the hold notice target start information (specifically, depending on the form of the notice target hold symbol hy that is finally displayed) It is suggested that a big hit gaming state may occur.
Here, the expectation of each aspect of the special hold is “red hold”, “purple hold”, “green hold”, “blue hold” in descending order of the big jackpot expectation (high hit expectation degree → high jackpot expectation degree) Low).

When the hold notice effect is executed, one or more hold change triggers and hold change contents corresponding to each hold change trigger are set. In the hold notice effect, the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy changes according to the hold change content corresponding to the hold change trigger in accordance with the arrival of the hold change trigger each time.
The “holding change opportunity” is an opportunity to change the aspect of the notice target holding symbol hy. Further, the “holding change content” is a content in which the aspect of the notice target holding symbol hy changes.
In the present embodiment, as a change change opportunity, a start time of a variation effect corresponding to each preceding hold information, a start time of a change effect corresponding to the hold notice target start information, and the like are defined. When the hold notice effect is executed, one or more hold change triggers are set from these hold change triggers.
In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is executed only for the special figure 1 start information among the special figure 1 start information and the special figure 2 start information.

(Variation production)
Next, each aspect of the variation effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the following description, the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a1 is “left symbol”, and the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a2 is “middle symbol”. The first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a3 is referred to as a “right symbol”.
In the present embodiment, the second effect symbol z2 is variably displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 at all times during the execution of the variation effect (first variation effect and second variation effect).

First, each aspect of the first variation effect will be described.
In the present embodiment, as the first variation effect mode (variation effect number), “pseudo-continuous variation effect” corresponding to “pseudo-continuous variation” and “pseudo-continuous variation 2” corresponding to “pseudo-continuous two variation”. An “effect”, a “pseudo continuous 3 variation effect” corresponding to “pseudo continuous 3 variation”, and a “pseudo continuous 4 variation effect” corresponding to “pseudo continuous 4 variation” are defined.
Also, modes corresponding to various types (variation pattern numbers) of “pseudo-continuous variation” are defined as modes (variable rendering number) of “pseudo-continuous variation effect”.

The “pseudo-continuous variation effect” includes a normal variation effect.
“Normal variation effect” refers to a display effect in which the first effect symbol z1 is normally varied and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. Specifically, in the normal variation effect, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally varied and displayed.
“Normal variation display” refers to a display in which the types of the first effect symbols z1 displayed at the lottery result display positions in the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 are sequentially switched.
The “lottery result display position” refers to a position where the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in a stop effect to be described later.
In the “pseudo-continuous variation effect”, the “normal variation effect” is started in response to the start. Then, in the “pseudo continuous variation effect”, the normal variation display (“normal variation effect”) of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is continued until the end of the “pseudo continuous variation effect”.
It should be noted that in the “pseudo-continuous variation effect”, a pseudo-variation effect described later is not executed.

The “pseudo continuous variation effect” (“pseudo continuous 2 variation effect”, “pseudo continuous 3 variation effect”, and “pseudo continuous 4 variation effect”) is the first effect symbol during the execution of one special symbol variation display. The variation display of z1 is an effect that is executed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner. Specifically, the pseudo continuous variation effect includes a plurality of pseudo variation effects.
The “pseudo-continuous two-change effect” is configured to include two pseudo-change effects. The “pseudo-continuous three-change effect” is configured to include three pseudo-change effects. The “pseudo four-variation effect” is configured to include four pseudo-change effects.
In the following description, among the pseudo variation effects included in the pseudo continuous variation effect, the last pseudo variation effect is referred to as a “last pseudo variation effect”. Further, among the pseudo variation effects included in the pseudo continuous variation effect, each time pseudo variation effect excluding the last round pseudo variation effect is referred to as “halfway pseudo variation effect”.

Each of the pseudo fluctuation effects (half-time pseudo fluctuation effect and final pseudo fluctuation effect) includes a normal fluctuation effect, a normal reach fluctuation effect, and a pseudo-continuous effect.
In the “normal reach variation effect”, the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped in two or more areas among the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and is temporarily stopped in two or more areas. A combination of the first effect symbols z1 is a display effect that is a combination included in the “big hit symbol”.
In the following description, in the normal reach variation effect (or the reduced reach variation effect described later), the first effect symbol z1 that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination included in the “big hit symbol” is referred to as “the first state that forms the reach state”. It is referred to as “design z1”.
Specifically, in the normal reach variation effect, the reach state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol. That is, in the normal reach variation effect, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the left symbol and the right symbol that are temporarily stopped are of the same type. In the normal reach variation effect, the normal variation display is continued for the middle symbol.
“Temporary stop display” is a state in which one kind of first effect symbol z1 is moved (swinged, rotated, etc.) in a predetermined manner at the lottery result display positions in the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. A display that continues for a predetermined time.

The “pseudo-continuous effect” is an effect that inquires whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is executed.
The “pseudo-continuous effect” is a type of pseudo-continuous effect that indicates (implies) whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is to be executed depending on whether or not the pseudo-continuous continuation symbol is temporarily displayed.
The “pseudo continuous continuation symbol” is configured to include information (in this embodiment, “NEXT” characters) that encourages execution of the next pseudo variation effect.
In the present embodiment, “pseudo continuous effect” and “pseudo continuous end effect” are defined as “pseudo continuous effect”.
The “pseudo continuous effect” is an effect that suggests that the next pseudo-variable effect is executed after asking whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is executed.
Specifically, in the “pseudo continuous continuation effect”, a pseudo continuous continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol, and the pseudo continuous continuation symbol moves toward the lottery result display position. At this time, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the pseudo continuous continuation symbol is slower than the movement speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal fluctuation display. In the “pseudo continuous continuation effect”, the pseudo continuous continuation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. This suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed.
The “pseudo-continuous end effect” is an effect suggesting that the next pseudo-variable effect is not executed after asking whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is executed.
Specifically, in the “pseudo-continuation end effect”, a pseudo-continuation continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol, similar to the pseudo-continuation continuation effect, and the pseudo-continuation continuation symbol moves toward the lottery result display position. Moving. At this time, the moving speed of the pseudo continuous continuation symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal variation display. In the “pseudo continuous end effect”, the pseudo continuous continuation symbol passes through the lottery result display position without being temporarily displayed. This suggests that the next pseudo fluctuation effect is not executed.

In each half-time pseudo variation effect, the reach variation effect is executed after the normal variation effect is executed. That is, after the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state is formed by the right symbol and the left symbol. Then, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed while the reach variation effect is being executed (when the reach state is being formed).
Each halfway pseudo-variable effect is ended in response to the end of the pseudo-continuous effect. Then, in response to the end of the midway pseudo variation effect, the next pseudo variation effect is started.
In each final pseudo variation effect, the reach variation effect is executed after the normal variation effect is executed. That is, after the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state is formed by the right symbol and the left symbol. Then, the pseudo-continuous end effect is executed while the reach fluctuation effect is being executed (while the reach state is being formed).
The final pseudo variation effect of each time is ended in accordance with the end of the pseudo-continuous effect. Then, the second variation effect (normal reach variation effect or super reach variation effect) is started in response to the end of the final pseudo variation effect.

Next, each aspect of the second variation effect will be described.
In the present embodiment, as the second variation effect mode (variation effect number), “reachless variation effect” corresponding to “reachless variation”, “normal reach variation effect” corresponding to “normal reach variation”, and “super “Super reach fluctuation production 1” corresponding to “reach fluctuation production 1”, “super reach fluctuation production 2” corresponding to “super reach fluctuation 2”, and “super reach fluctuation production 3” corresponding to “super reach fluctuation 3”. And “super reach variation effect 4” corresponding to “super reach variation 4” and “super reach variation effect 5” corresponding to “super reach variation 5” are defined.
Also, modes corresponding to various types of “variation without reach” (variation pattern numbers) are defined as modes (variation production numbers) of “variation production without reach”.
Also, modes corresponding to various types of “normal reach variation” (variation pattern numbers) are defined as modes (variation effect numbers) of “normal reach variation effects”.

The “unreachable variation effect” is configured to include a normal variation effect as a display effect.
Specifically, in the “reaching variation effect without reach”, the “normal variation effect” is executed in response to the start. That is, the normal variation display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is started.
In the “unreachable variation effect”, the normal variation display (“normal variation effect”) of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol is continued until the end of the “reachless variation effect”. Then, the stop effect is started in response to the end of the “non-reach fluctuation effect”.
Note that the reach variation effect and the development reach effect, which will be described later, are not executed in the reach-less variation effect.

The “normal reach fluctuation effect” is configured to include a normal reach fluctuation effect.
Specifically, in the “normal reach fluctuation effect”, the normal reach fluctuation effect is executed in response to the start. That is, the left symbol and the right symbol form a reach state. The normal reach variation effect is ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start thereof.
The “normal reach variation effect” is terminated in response to the end of the normal reach variation effect. Then, the stop effect is started in response to the end of the “normal reach fluctuation effect”.
In the normal reach variation effect, the development reach effect described later is not executed.

“Super reach variation effect” (“super reach change effect 1” to “super reach change effect 5”) includes a normal reach change effect, a reduced reach change effect, and an extended reach effect as display effects. Has been.
The “reduction reach variation effect” refers to a display effect in which the first effect symbol z1 forming the reach state is reduced and displayed (temporary stop display). In particular, in the reduced reach variation effect, only the first effect symbol z1 that forms the reach state is displayed, and the display of the first effect symbol z1 that does not form the reach state is omitted. Specifically, in the reduced reach variation display, the right symbol and the left symbol forming the reach state are temporarily stopped in a reduced state, and the middle symbol is not displayed.

The “development reach effect” is an effect encouraging that the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4. The development reach production is executed during the reach variation production.
In the present embodiment, “Development Reach Production 1” to “Development Reach Production 5” having different contents are defined as types of development reach production.
Then, in “super reach fluctuation production 1”, “development reach production 1” is executed as the development reach production. “Development reach effect 1” includes the display of “Development reach effect image 1” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 1” is an effect image by “character A”.
On the other hand, in the “super reach fluctuation production 2”, “development reach production 2” is executed as the development reach production. “Development reach effect 2” includes the display of “development reach effect image 2” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 2” is an effect image by “character B”.
On the other hand, in the “super reach variation effect 3”, the “advance reach effect 3” is executed as the advance reach effect. “Development reach effect 3” includes display of “Development reach effect image 3” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 3” is an effect image by “character C”.
On the other hand, in the “super reach fluctuation effect 4”, the “advance reach effect 4” is executed as the advance reach effect. “Development reach effect 4” includes a display of “development reach effect image 4” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 4” is an effect image by “character D”.
On the other hand, in the “super reach fluctuation effect 5”, the “advance reach effect 5” is executed as the advance reach effect. “Development reach effect 5” includes a display of “development reach effect image 5” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 5” is an effect image by “character E”.
As a result, the jackpot expectations for various types of development reach production are “development reach production 5”, “development reach production 4”, “development reach production 3”, and “development reach super production” in descending order of the jackpot expectation degree. 2 ”,“ Development Reach Production 1 ”(High expectations for jackpot → Low expectations for jackpot).

In “super reach variation effect” (“super reach variation effect 1” to “super reach variation effect 5”), the reduced reach variation effect is executed after the normal reach variation effect is executed.
That is, from the state in which the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state, the left symbol and the right symbol that form the reach state are reduced, and the reduced left symbol is moved to the upper left end portion of the display screen 31a and reduced. The displayed right symbol is moved to the upper right end portion of the display screen 31a, and the display of the middle symbol disappears. At this time, the reach state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol that are stopped and displayed in the stop effect related to the predetermined stop effect number.
In the “super reach variation effect”, “development reach effect” (“development reach effect 1” to “development reach effect 5”) is executed during the period in which the reduction reach variation effect is being executed.
That is, the “development reach effect” is started in response to the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the reduced reach fluctuation effect. The “development reach production” is ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start thereof.
The “super reach variation effect” is ended in response to the end of the “development reach effect”. Then, the stop effect is started in response to the end of the “super reach fluctuation effect”.

(Short-term continuous judge production)
In the pachinko machine 1, when “big hit 5” or “big hit 6” is won, the short-time continuous judgment effect is executed during the execution of the short-time control generated in response to the end of the big-hit gaming state.
The “short-time continuation judge effect” is an effect that suggests (notifies) whether or not the short-time control is continued. In other words, the short-time continuation judge effect is an effect that suggests the current gaming state (“special figure high probability state” or “special figure low probability state”). In other words, the short-time continuous judgment effect is an effect suggesting the type of the previous jackpot gaming state ("big hit 5" or "big hit 6").
As described above, the aspect of the effect symbols z1 and z2 that are stopped when the “big hit 5” is won and the direction of the effect symbols z1 and z2 that are stopped when the “big hit 6” is won are: They are the same (specifically, “latent symbol”).
In addition, the number of round games executed when winning “big hit 5” and the number of round games executed when winning “big hit 6” are the same (specifically, 5 [times] ]).
Further, the contents of the jackpot effect that is executed when the “big hit 5” is won and the contents of the jackpot effect that is executed when the “big hit 6” is won are the same.
As a result, when a player wins “Big Jack 5” or “Big Jack 6”, the player cannot distinguish between the two based on the form of the stop symbol, the number of round games, the content of the big jackpot, etc. After the big hit gaming state, the game progresses while predicting the current gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state").
Here, as described above, when “big hit 5” is won, 10000 [times] is set as the predetermined number of times. As a result, when the “big hit 5” is won, the time-saving control is continued after the end of the big hit gaming state until the 10,000th special symbol notification display is finished unless the big hit gaming state is generated.
On the other hand, when “big hit 6” is won, 100 [times] is set as the predetermined number of times. As a result, when the “big hit 6” is won, the time-saving control is continued after the end of the big hit gaming state until the 100th special symbol notification display is finished unless the big hit gaming state is generated.
Therefore, if the player wins “Big Jack 5” or “Big Jack 6”, the winning game will be won based on the execution status of the short-time control at the time of the start of the 101st special symbol notification display after the jackpot gaming state ends. The type (“big hit 5” or “big hit 6”) can be determined, and further the current gaming state (“special figure high probability state” or “special figure low probability state”) can be discriminated.
In other words, if the player wins “big hit 5” or “big hit 6”, the winning type (“big hit 5” or “big hit” or until the end of the 100th special symbol notification display after the end of the big hit gaming state. "Big jackpot 6") cannot be determined, and further, the current gaming state ("Special figure high probability state" or "Special figure low probability state") cannot be determined.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when winning “big hit 5” or “big hit 6”, after the end of the big hit gaming state, during the 100th special symbol notification display, the short-time continuous judgment effect is executed. Yes.
In the present embodiment, when “big hit 5” or “big hit 6” is won, after the end of the big hit gaming state, during the 100th variation production (hereinafter referred to as “specific variation production”), it continues for a short time. Judge production is executed.

In the time-saving continuation judgment effect, a mission (task) is imposed on the player, and whether or not the time-saving control is continued (current game state) is suggested by the success or failure of the mission. At this time, if the mission is successful, it is suggested that the time reduction control is continued (the current gaming state is a “special figure high probability state”). On the other hand, if the mission is unsuccessful, it is suggested that the time reduction control is terminated (the current gaming state is a “special figure low probability state”).
The short duration continuation judge effect is an effect using the effect button 5b. In other words, the operation valid state is set during execution of the short-time continuous judgment effect. Then, during the period when the operation valid state is set, the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is valid. On the other hand, during the period when the operation valid state is released, the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is invalidated.
Specifically, in the short time continuous judge effect, the operation valid state is set in response to the elapse of a predetermined introduction time from the start. In addition, among the fact that a predetermined operation effective time has elapsed from the setting of the operation effective state, and that the value of an effect stage counter described later has reached a predetermined maximum value (the effect stage has reached the final stage) In response to the establishment of one condition, the operation valid state is released. Furthermore, in response to the elapse of a predetermined notification time from the cancellation of the operation valid state, the short time continuous judgment effect is ended. In the present embodiment, the specific variation effect is ended and the stop effect is started in response to the end of the short-time continuous judge effect.
In the following description, a period from the start of the short-time continuous judgment effect until a predetermined introduction time has elapsed (until the operation valid state is set) is referred to as an “introduction period”. The period from the setting of the operation valid state to the release of the operation valid state is referred to as an “operation valid period”. Furthermore, a period from when the operation valid state is released until a predetermined notification time elapses (until the end of the short time continuous judgment effect) is referred to as a “result notification period”.
In the short duration continuous judge effect, the effect content (specifically, the content of a door image to be described later) changes stepwise in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period. In the present embodiment, the contents of the effect of the short-time continuous judgment effect change in six stages at maximum from the initial stage to the final stage.
In the short-time continuous judge production, as the above-mentioned mission, the stage of the production content (hereinafter referred to as “production stage”) is required to reach the final stage. That is, when the production stage reaches the final stage, the mission is successful. On the other hand, if the production stage does not reach the final stage, the mission fails.
Hereinafter, the contents of the short-term continuous judge production will be described in detail.

The short duration continuation judgment effect is configured to include the display of the effect image on the display screen 31a. In the present embodiment, “introduction image”, “mission image”, “result notification image”, and the like are defined as effect images corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect.
The “introduction image” is displayed during the introduction period. The “introduction image” is configured to include a display of information explaining the content of the mission to be started (in this embodiment, “let the door open by pressing the button repeatedly! Characters that open for a short time by opening the door!”). .
The “mission image” is displayed during the operation effective period. “Mission image” is a display of a door image, an icon imitating the effect button 5b, and information that prompts the user to continuously press the effect button 5b (in this embodiment, the characters “continuous hit!”). And a display of information indicating the remaining time until the operation valid period ends (in this embodiment, a time bar indicating the remaining time).
The “door image” is an image indicating the current stage of production (the value of the current stage of production counter). In the present embodiment, the door image is an image simulating a door. And in a mission image, the present production stage is shown according to the opening amount of the door in a door image. At this time, the door opening amount in the door image increases as the current stage of production is higher (the stage closer to the final stage).
The “result notification image” is displayed during the result notification period.
The “result notification image” is an image that notifies the success or failure of the mission.
In the present embodiment, a “breakthrough success image” and a “breakthrough failure image” are defined as “result notification images”.
The “breakthrough success image” includes a display of information (in this embodiment, an image showing a state where the door is fully opened and a character “breakthrough success!”) For notifying (suggesting) the success of the mission. Has been.
The “breakthrough failure image” includes a display of information (in this embodiment, an image showing a state where the door is closed and a character “breakthrough failure!”) For notifying (suggesting) a mission failure. Has been.

The effect control circuit 300 includes an operation effective elapsed time timer that counts the operation effective elapsed time T. In the short time continuous judgment effect, the measurement of the operation effective elapsed time T by the operation effective elapsed time timer is started according to the start of the operation effective period (setting of the operation effective state). Then, when the operation effective elapsed time T measured by the operation effective elapsed time timer reaches the predetermined operation effective time, the operation effective period is ended (the operation effective state is released).
The “operation effective elapsed time T” is an elapsed time from the setting of the operation effective state (start of the operation effective period).
The effect control circuit 300 includes an effect stage counter that counts the effect stages. In the short-time continuous judgment effect, the effect content corresponding to the value of the effect stage counter is set. Specifically, the content corresponding to the value of the production stage counter is set as the content of the door image.
That is, at the start of the operation effective period, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the effect stage counter. Thereby, at the start of the operation effective period, the production stage becomes the initial stage, and the door in the door image is closed.
In addition, in the short-time continuous judgment effect, each time a depressing operation of the effect button 5b is detected during the operation effective period, an added value is selected, and the selected added value is added to the value of the current effect stage counter. . At this time, in the present embodiment, any value from “0” to “3” is selected as the addition value. As a result, when a value equal to or greater than “1” is selected as the added value, the effect stage is increased and the door opening amount in the door image is increased.
The “added value” is a value that is added to the value of the effect stage counter in response to detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b each time.
In the short-time continuous judgment effect, when the value of the effect stage counter reaches a predetermined maximum value during the operation effective period, the effect stage reaches the final stage and the door in the door image is fully opened. . This makes the mission a success. Here, “6” is defined as the predetermined maximum value in the short-time continuous judgment effect.
On the other hand, if the value of the production stage counter does not reach the predetermined maximum value during the operation effective period, the production stage does not reach the final stage, and the door in the door image is not fully opened. This results in a mission failure.

In the short duration continuous judgment effect, when the current game state is “special figure high probability state” (when the type of the previous big hit game state is “big hit 5”), the effect button 5b during the operation valid period is displayed. By the pressing operation, the value of the production stage counter can be increased to a predetermined maximum value.
In this case, even if the value of the effect stage counter does not reach the predetermined maximum value due to an insufficient number of pressing operations of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period, the operation effective period In accordance with the end of the operation (elapse of the operation valid time), the value of the production stage counter is forcibly increased to a predetermined maximum value.
On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the “special figure low probability state” (when the type of the previous big hit gaming state is “big hit 6”), by pressing the effect button 5b during the operation valid period, It becomes impossible to increase the value of the production stage counter to a predetermined maximum value. That is, even if the number of pressing operations of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period is sufficient, the value of the effect stage counter does not reach the predetermined maximum value.
In the short-time continuous judgment effect, when the current gaming state is “special figure high probability state” (when the type of the previous big hit gaming state is “big hit 5”), according to the end of the operation valid period Thus, the “breakthrough success image” is displayed as the “result notification image”.
On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the “special figure low probability state” (when the type of the previous big hit gaming state is “big hit 6”), according to the end of the operation valid period, the “result notification image” ", A breakthrough failure image" is displayed.

(Chance up production)
In the pachinko machine 1, when “Super Reach Variation 1” or “Super Reach Variation 2” is selected as the variation pattern type during the occurrence of the “Special Figure High Probability Game State”, the “Development Reach Production” is being executed. In addition, a chance-up effect is executed.
The “chance up effect” is an effect that suggests (notifies) the degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the contents of the effect.
The chance up effect is an effect using the effect button 5b. That is, the operation valid state is set during execution of the chance up effect.
Specifically, in the chance-up effect, the operation valid state is set according to the elapse of a predetermined introduction time from the start. In addition, one of the operation effective time has elapsed since the setting of the operation effective state, and the value of the production stage counter has reached a predetermined maximum value (the production stage has reached the final stage). When the condition is satisfied, the operation valid state is released. Furthermore, the chance-up effect is ended in response to the elapse of a predetermined notification time from the cancellation of the operation valid state. Here, in the chance-up effect, “4” is defined as a predetermined maximum value.
In the following description, a period from the start of the chance up effect until a predetermined introduction time elapses (until the operation valid state is set) is referred to as an “introduction period”. The period from the setting of the operation valid state to the release of the operation valid state is referred to as an “operation valid period”. Furthermore, a period from when the operation valid state is released until a predetermined notification time elapses (until the end of the chance-up effect) is referred to as a “result notification period”.
In the chance-up effect, the effect content (specifically, the number of icon images displayed in a lighting manner described later) changes stepwise in accordance with the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period. In the present embodiment, the production contents of the chance-up effect change in four stages at maximum from the initial stage to the final stage.
In the chance-up effect, the big hit expectation degree is suggested by the effect stage finally reached and the contents of the chance-up image described later.
Hereinafter, the contents of the chance up effect will be described in detail.

The chance up effect includes the display of the effect image on the display screen 31a. In the present embodiment, “introduction image”, “button image”, “chance up image”, and the like are defined as effect images corresponding to the chance up effect.
The “introduction image” is displayed during the introduction period. “Introductory image” displays information (in this embodiment, “Long press the button!”) Indicating that the depressing operation of the effect button 5b can be performed (operation valid period starts). It is configured to include.
The “button image” is displayed during the operation effective period. The “button image” is an icon image, an icon imitating the effect button 5b, and a display of information prompting the user to press and hold the effect button 5b (in this embodiment, “Long press!”). And display of information indicating the remaining time until the operation effective period ends (in this embodiment, a time bar indicating the remaining time).
The “long press operation” is an operation for maintaining the state where the effect button 5b is pressed.
The “icon image” is an image indicating the current effect stage (the value of the current effect stage counter). In the present embodiment, four icon images are displayed in the button image. Each icon image is an image imitating numbers, characters, characters, and the like. Each icon image is displayed in one of a lighting mode and a lighting mode. In the button image, the jackpot expectation is suggested by the number of icon images finally displayed in the lighting mode (hereinafter referred to as “the number of final lighting”). At this time, the greater the final number of lighting, the higher the expected degree of jackpot.
The “chance up image” is displayed during the result notification period.
Like the icon image, the “chance-up image” is an image that suggests a big hit expectation.
In the present embodiment, an image corresponding to the final lighting number is displayed as the “chance-up image”.
That is, as the “chance-up image”, “chance-up image a” corresponding to the final lighting number = “0”, “chance-up image b” corresponding to the final lighting number = “1”, and the final lighting number = “ “Chance-up image c” corresponding to “2”, “chance-up image d” corresponding to final lighting number = “3”, and “chance-up image e” corresponding to final lighting number = “4”. It is prescribed.
Thereby, the big hit expectation degree of each chance up image is “chance up image e”, “chance up image d”, “chance up image c”, “chance up image b”, in descending order of the big hit expectation degree. It is defined to be “chance-up image a” (high expectation degree of big hit → low expectation degree of big hit).

In the chance up effect, measurement of the operation effective elapsed time T by the operation effective elapsed time timer is started in response to the start of the operation effective period (setting of the operation effective state). Then, when the operation effective elapsed time T measured by the operation effective elapsed time timer reaches the predetermined operation effective time, the operation effective period is ended (the operation effective state is released).
In the chance-up effect, the effect stage is counted by the effect stage counter. Then, the production contents corresponding to the value of the production stage counter are set. Specifically, out of the four icon images, the number of icon images displayed in the lighting mode is a number corresponding to the value of the production stage counter (specifically, the same number as the value of the production stage counter). Is set.
That is, at the start of the operation effective period, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the effect stage counter. Thereby, at the start of the operation effective period, the effect stage becomes the initial stage, and all icon images are displayed in a light-off mode.
Further, in the chance-up effect, each time an operation of pressing the effect button 5b during the operation effective period is detected, an addition value is selected, and the selected addition value is added to the value of the current effect stage counter. At this time, in the present embodiment, any value from “0” to “3” is selected as the addition value. As a result, when a value equal to or greater than “1” is selected as the addition value, the stage of production rises, and the number of icon images displayed in a lighting manner increases in the four icon images.
When the chance up effect is executed, the final lighting number is selected. Then, in the chance-up effect, the value of the effect stage counter can be increased to the number of pre-selected final lightings by pressing the effect button 5b during the operation effective period (long pressing operation). That is, it is possible to increase the number of icon images displayed in the lighting mode up to the final lighting number selected in advance.
At this time, even when the value of the effect stage counter has not reached the preselected final lighting number due to insufficient pressing operation (long pressing) of the effect button 5b during the operation valid period, In accordance with the end of the operation effective period (elapse of operation effective time), the value of the effect stage counter is forcibly increased to the number of final lightings selected in advance. That is, when the number of icon images displayed in the lighting mode does not reach the preselected final lighting number due to insufficient pressing operation (long pressing) of the effect button 5b during the operation valid period. Even in such a case, the number of icon images displayed in the lighting mode is forcibly increased to the final lighting number selected in advance according to the end of the operation effective period (elapse of the operation effective time).
Further, in the chance up effect, a “chance up image” is displayed according to the end of the operation valid period. At this time, an image corresponding to the final lighting number is displayed as the “chance-up image”.

(Button notice production)
In the pachinko machine 1, the main notice effect is executed while the change effect is being executed.
The “main notice effect” is an effect executed during the variation effect, and suggests the result of the start determination (special figure winning determination, special figure stop symbol determination, special diagram variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the variable effect. It has become a directing.
In the present embodiment, the main notice effect is executed during the first variation effect. Then, the main notice effect suggests the result of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination (specifically, the possibility that the type of the fluctuation pattern is “super reach fluctuation” (hereinafter referred to as “reach expectation”)).
In the present embodiment, a plurality of types with different contents of the effect are defined as types of the main notice effect. In particular, a button notice effect is included as a type of main notice effect.

The “button notice effect” is an effect that suggests (notifies) the degree of reach expectation according to the contents of the effect.
The button notice effect is an effect using the effect button 5b. That is, the operation valid state is set during execution of the button notice effect.
Specifically, in the button notice effect, the operation valid state is set in response to the elapse of a predetermined introduction time from the start. In addition, one of the operation effective time has elapsed since the setting of the operation effective state, and the value of the production stage counter has reached a predetermined maximum value (the production stage has reached the final stage). When the condition is satisfied, the operation valid state is released. And according to cancellation | release of an operation valid state, the said button notice effect is complete | finished. Here, in the button notice effect, “10” is defined as a predetermined maximum value.
In the following description, a period from the start of the button notice effect until a predetermined introduction time elapses (until the operation valid state is set) is referred to as an “introduction period”. The period from the setting of the operation valid state to the release of the operation valid state is referred to as an “operation valid period”.
In the button notice effect, the content of the effect (specifically, the range in which the concealment of the character image described later is released) changes stepwise in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period. In the present embodiment, the contents of the effect of the button notice effect change by a maximum of 10 stages from the initial stage to the final stage.
In the button notice effect, the reach expectation level is suggested by the effect stage finally reached. In the present embodiment, reach expectation is suggested depending on whether or not the production stage reaches the final stage. That is, when the production stage reaches the final stage, it is suggested that the reach expectation is higher than when the production stage does not reach the final stage.
Hereinafter, the contents of the button notice effect will be described in detail.

The button notice effect includes the display of the effect image on the display screen 31a. In the present embodiment, “introduction image”, “notice image”, and the like are defined as effect images corresponding to the button notice effect.
The “introduction image” is displayed during the introduction period. The “introduction image” includes information indicating the content of the notice effect (in this embodiment, “let's release the concealment of the character image by repeatedly pressing the button!”).
The “notice image” is displayed during the operation valid period. The “notice image” is a display of a character image, an icon imitating the effect button 5b, and information that prompts the user to continuously press the effect button 5b (in this embodiment, the characters “continuous hit!”). And display of information indicating the remaining time until the operation valid period ends (in this embodiment, a time bar indicating the remaining time).
The “character image” is an image indicating the current stage of production (the value of the current stage of production counter). In the present embodiment, the character image is divided into “10” image areas. Each image area can be displayed in one of a concealed state and a concealed state. At this time, the player cannot visually recognize the image area displayed in the concealed state. On the other hand, the player can view the image area displayed in the state where the concealment is released. In the preview image, the reach expectation level is suggested depending on whether or not all image areas constituting the character image are displayed in a state where the concealment is released (whether or not the entire character image can be viewed). Is done. At this time, when the display is performed in a state in which the concealment is released for all the image areas, the reach expectation is higher than in the case where the display is performed in a state in which at least one image area is concealed.

In the button notice effect, measurement of the operation effective elapsed time T by the operation effective elapsed time timer is started according to the start of the operation effective period (setting of the operation effective state). Then, when the operation effective elapsed time T measured by the operation effective elapsed time timer reaches the predetermined operation effective time, the operation effective period is ended (the operation effective state is released).
In the button notice effect, the effect stage is counted by the effect stage counter. Then, the production contents corresponding to the value of the production stage counter are set. Specifically, out of the image areas of “10”, the number of image areas displayed in a state where the concealment is released is a number corresponding to the value of the production stage counter (specifically, the value of the production stage counter). The same number).
That is, at the start of the operation effective period, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the effect stage counter. Thus, at the start of the operation effective period, the effect stage becomes the initial stage, and all image areas are displayed in a concealed state. This makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the entire character image.
In addition, in the button notice effect, an addition value is selected every time an operation of pressing the effect button 5b during the operation valid period is detected, and the selected addition value is added to the value of the current effect stage counter. At this time, in the present embodiment, any value from “0” to “3” is selected as the addition value. As a result, when a value equal to or greater than “1” is selected as the addition value, the production stage is increased, and the number of image areas displayed in the state where the concealment is released increases in the image area “10”. To do. This increases the portion of the character image that can be viewed by the player.
Then, in the button notice effect, when the value of the effect stage counter reaches a predetermined maximum value during the operation effective period, the effect stage reaches the final stage, and the concealment is released for all the image areas. Displayed with status. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the entire character image.
On the other hand, if the value of the production stage counter does not reach the predetermined maximum value during the operation valid period, the production stage does not reach the final stage, and at least one image area is displayed in a concealed state. The This makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the character image.

In the button effect, when the “super reach change effect” is executed during the change effect in which the button notice effect is executed, the value of the effect stage counter is set to a predetermined value by depressing the effect button 5b during the operation effective period. It is possible to increase to the maximum value of.
In this case, even if the value of the effect stage counter does not reach the predetermined maximum value due to an insufficient number of pressing operations of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period, the operation effective period In accordance with the end of the operation (elapse of the operation valid time), the value of the production stage counter is forcibly increased to a predetermined maximum value.
On the other hand, when the “super reach variation effect” is not executed during the change effect in which the button notice effect is executed, the value of the effect stage counter is set to a predetermined maximum value by pressing the effect button 5b during the operation effective period. It becomes impossible to increase it. That is, even if the number of pressing operations of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period is sufficient, the value of the effect stage counter does not reach the predetermined maximum value.

(Selection method of added value in operation device production)
Next, a method for selecting the added value in the operation device effect will be described.
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a configuration of an upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short duration continuous judgment effect. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an upper limit selection table corresponding to a chance-up effect. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a configuration of an upper limit value selection table corresponding to the button notice effect.
The “operation device effect” is an effect using an operation means that can be operated by the player. In the present embodiment, a short-time continuation judge effect, a chance-up effect, and a button notice effect are defined as operation device effects. And in each operation device production, production button 5b is used as an operation means. Note that the operation means used in the operation device effect is not limited to the effect button 5b, and other operation means (operation lever, operation handle, etc.) may be used as long as an operation by the player is possible.
As described above, in each operation device effect (short-time continuation judge effect, chance-up effect, and button notice effect), an addition value is selected according to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period. .
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, an added value is selected using a common process (program) for all operation device effects.

That is, in each operation device effect, an addition value selection process (see FIG. 41) is executed each time a press operation of the effect button 5b is detected during the operation effective period.
In the addition value selection process, first, a counter upper limit value acquisition process is executed. In the counter upper limit value acquisition process, the counter upper limit value is acquired.
The “counter upper limit value” is a value that specifies the upper limit of the value of the stage counter that is permitted to reach. In other words, the counter upper limit value is a value that specifies the upper limit of the stage of production that is allowed to reach. That is, in each addition value selection process, the addition value is selected so that the value of the effect stage counter after adding the addition value does not exceed the acquired counter upper limit value.
In particular, in each operation device effect, the operation effective period is divided into a plurality of effect sections based on the operation effective elapsed time T. In addition, a counter upper limit value corresponding to each effect section is defined. Then, in the addition value selection process, the counter upper limit value corresponding to the time (effect section) when the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is detected is acquired.

Specifically, in the short-time continuous judgment effect, 5.0 [s] is set as the predetermined operation effective time. Then, the period from the setting of the operation effective state until the operation effective elapsed time T reaches the predetermined operation effective time (5.0 [s]) is divided into “10” effect sections.
That is, in the short-time continuous judgment effect, as the effect section, effect section 1 corresponding to 0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <0.5 [s] and 0.5 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T < Effect section 2 corresponding to 1.0 [s], effect section 3 corresponding to 1.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <1.5 [s], and 1.5 [s] ≦ operation effective Effect section 4 corresponding to elapsed time T <2.0 [s], effect section 5 corresponding to 2.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <2.5 [s], and 2.5 [s ] ≦ actuation section 6 corresponding to operation effective elapsed time T <3.0 [s], effect section 7 corresponding to 3.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <3.5 [s], and 3 .5 [s] ≦ actuation section 8 corresponding to operation effective elapsed time T <4.0 [s] and performance corresponding to 4.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <4.5 [s] A section 9, a demonstration section 10 that corresponds to 4.5 [s] ≦ valid operation elapsed time T <5.0 [s], is defined.
And the counter upper limit is prescribed | regulated about each production area (production area 1-production area 10).

On the other hand, in the chance up effect, 5.5 [s] is set as the predetermined operation effective time. Then, the period from the setting of the operation effective state until the operation effective elapsed time T reaches the predetermined operation effective time (5.5 [s]) is divided into “11” effect sections.
That is, in the chance-up effect, as the effect section, effect section 1 corresponding to 0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <0.5 [s] and 0.5 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <1. Production section 2 corresponding to 0.0 [s], production section 3 corresponding to 1.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <1.5 [s], and 1.5 [s] ≦ operation effective progress Effect section 4 corresponding to time T <2.0 [s], effect section 5 corresponding to 2.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <2.5 [s], and 2.5 [s] 2. Effect section 6 corresponding to operation effective elapsed time T <3.0 [s], effect section 7 corresponding to 3.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <3.5 [s], and 3. Effect section 8 corresponding to 5 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <4.0 [s] and effect corresponding to 4.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <4.5 [s] Between 9 and 4.5 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <5.0 [s], the production section 10 and 5.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <5.5 [s] The production section 11 corresponding to is defined.
And the counter upper limit is prescribed | regulated about each production area (production area 1-production area 11).

On the other hand, in the button notice effect, 6.5 [s] is set as the predetermined operation effective time. Then, the period from the setting of the operation effective state until the operation effective elapsed time T reaches the predetermined operation effective time (6.5 [s]) is divided into “13” effect sections.
That is, in the button notice effect, as the effect section, effect section 1 corresponding to 0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <0.5 [s] and 0.5 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <1. Production section 2 corresponding to 0.0 [s], production section 3 corresponding to 1.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <1.5 [s], and 1.5 [s] ≦ operation effective progress Effect section 4 corresponding to time T <2.0 [s], effect section 5 corresponding to 2.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <2.5 [s], and 2.5 [s] 2. Effect section 6 corresponding to operation effective elapsed time T <3.0 [s], effect section 7 corresponding to 3.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <3.5 [s], and 3. Effect section 8 corresponding to 5 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <4.0 [s], and effect section corresponding to 4.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <4.5 [s] And 4.5 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <5.0 [s] and the production section 10 corresponds to 5.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <5.5 [s]. Effect section 11 and 5.5 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <6.0 [s], and effect section 12 6.0 [s] ≦ operation effective elapsed time T <6.5 [ s] is defined.
And the counter upper limit is prescribed | regulated about each production area (production area 1-production area 13).

The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores an upper limit value selection table in which counter upper limit values corresponding to each effect section are stored (registered).
In addition, an upper limit value selection table corresponding to each operation device effect is stored as the upper limit value selection table.
Specifically, as an upper limit value selection table, an upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect, an upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance up effect, and an upper limit value selection table corresponding to the button notice effect are stored. Has been.
As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, each upper limit value selection table is configured to include a prescribed number of records (in the present embodiment, “11”). That is, each upper limit value selection table is configured to include records corresponding to each of record number 1 to record number 11.
Each record is configured to include a prescribed number of fields (in this embodiment, “13”). That is, each record is configured to include fields corresponding to field numbers 1 to 13. Here, in each upper limit value selection table, the number of fields included in the records is the same for all records.
Each field is configured with a prescribed capacity (for example, 4 [bits]). Here, in each upper limit value selection table, the field capacity is the same for all fields. Thereby, in each upper limit value selection table, the record capacity is the same for all records.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the capacities of the upper limit value selection tables are the same for all operation device effects.
That is, the capacity of the upper limit value selection table is the same in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect, the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance up effect, and the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the button notice effect. It has become.
Specifically, the number of records included in the upper limit selection table (the number of stored button scenarios to be described later) includes an upper limit selection table corresponding to a short-time continuous judgment effect, an upper limit selection table corresponding to a chance-up effect, and a button. This is the same as the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the notice effect.
In addition, the number of fields included in each record is as follows: an upper limit selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect, an upper limit selection table corresponding to the chance up effect, and an upper limit selection table corresponding to the button notice effect. It is the same.
Furthermore, the capacity of each field is the same in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect, the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance-up effect, and the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the button notice effect. Yes.
As described above, the number of rows (maximum value of the number of rows) and the number of columns (maximum value of the number of columns) are the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect, and the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance-up effect. The upper limit value selection table corresponding to the button notice effect is the same.
Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1, it becomes possible to select an added value using a common process (program) for all operation device effects. Further, it is possible to define a table (specifically, to set table information described later) using a common process (program) for all upper limit value selection tables.

And in the pachinko machine 1, in order to make the capacity | capacitance of an upper limit value selection table the same about all the operation device effects, the upper limit value selection table corresponding to each operation device effect is comprised as shown below.
That is, in the upper limit selection table corresponding to each operation device effect, a field corresponding to each effect section defined in the operation device effect is defined in each record. And the counter upper limit value corresponding to the said effect area is memorize | stored in the field corresponding to each effect area.
Here, as described above, the effect section of “10” is defined in the time-saving continuous judge effect. On the other hand, in the chance up effect, an effect section of “11” is defined. On the other hand, in the button notice effect, an effect section of “13” is defined.
Accordingly, among all the operation device effects, the operation device effect having the largest number of defined effect sections is a button notice effect.
Therefore, in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to each operation device effect, the number of fields included in each record is matched with the number of effect sections defined in the button notice effect. That is, the number of fields included in each record is “13”.

As a result, in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judge effect, the number of fields included in each record is larger than the number of effect sections defined in the short-time continuous judge effect = “10”.
As a result, in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect, an effective area and an invalid area are defined in each record.
The “effective area” is an area associated with the production section, that is, an area in which the counter upper limit value is stored.
The “invalid area” is an area that is not associated with an effect section, that is, an area in which no counter upper limit value is stored. A predetermined invalid value INV is stored in the invalid area.
That is, as shown in FIG. 42, in each record included in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short time continuous judgment effect, the field group corresponding to the field number 1 to the field number 10 becomes an effective area, and the field number 11 to the field A field group corresponding to the number 13 becomes an invalid area.
Specifically, in each record included in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the short duration continuous judgment effect, the field corresponding to field number 1 is associated with effect segment 1, and the counter upper limit value corresponding to effect segment 1 is stored. Has been. A field corresponding to field number 2 is associated with effect section 2 and a counter upper limit value corresponding to effect section 2 is stored. Further, the field corresponding to the field number 3 is associated with the effect section 3, and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 3 is stored. Further, the field corresponding to the field number 4 is associated with the effect section 4, and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 4 is stored. Further, the field corresponding to the field number 5 is associated with the effect section 5, and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 5 is stored. The field corresponding to the field number 6 is associated with the effect section 6 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 6 is stored. The field corresponding to the field number 7 is associated with the effect section 7 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 7 is stored. The field corresponding to the field number 8 is associated with the effect section 8 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 8 is stored. The field corresponding to the field number 9 is associated with the effect section 9 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 9 is stored. A field corresponding to the field number 10 is associated with the effect section 10, and a counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 10 is stored.
On the other hand, in each record included in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect, the field corresponding to each field number of the field number 11 to the field number 13 is not associated with the effect section, and is an invalid value. INV is stored.

Similarly, in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance up effect, the number of fields included in each record is larger than the number of effect sections defined in the chance up effect = “11”.
As a result, in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the chance-up effect, the valid area and the invalid area are defined in each record.
That is, as shown in FIG. 43, in each record included in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the chance-up effect, the field group corresponding to field number 1 to field number 11 is an effective area, and field number 12 to field number. A field group corresponding to 13 is an invalid area.
Specifically, in each record included in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the chance-up effect, the field corresponding to field number 1 is associated with effect segment 1 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to effect segment 1 is stored. ing. A field corresponding to field number 2 is associated with effect section 2 and a counter upper limit value corresponding to effect section 2 is stored. Further, the field corresponding to the field number 3 is associated with the effect section 3, and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 3 is stored. Further, the field corresponding to the field number 4 is associated with the effect section 4, and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 4 is stored. Further, the field corresponding to the field number 5 is associated with the effect section 5, and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 5 is stored. The field corresponding to the field number 6 is associated with the effect section 6 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 6 is stored. The field corresponding to the field number 7 is associated with the effect section 7 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 7 is stored. The field corresponding to the field number 8 is associated with the effect section 8 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 8 is stored. The field corresponding to the field number 9 is associated with the effect section 9 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 9 is stored. A field corresponding to the field number 10 is associated with the effect section 10, and a counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 10 is stored. Further, the field corresponding to the field number 11 is associated with the effect section 11, and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 11 is stored.
On the other hand, in each record included in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance up effect, the field corresponding to each field number of the field number 12 to the field number 13 is not associated with the effect section, and the invalid value INV. Is remembered.

On the other hand, in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the button notice effect, the number of fields included in each record matches the number of effect sections defined in the button notice effect = “13”.
Thereby, in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the button notice effect, only the valid area is defined and the invalid area is not defined in each record.
That is, as shown in FIG. 44, in each record included in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the button notice effect, the field group corresponding to field number 1 to field number 13 is an effective area.
Specifically, in each record included in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the button notice effect, the field corresponding to field number 1 is associated with effect segment 1 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to effect segment 1 is stored. ing. A field corresponding to field number 2 is associated with effect section 2 and a counter upper limit value corresponding to effect section 2 is stored. Further, the field corresponding to the field number 3 is associated with the effect section 3, and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 3 is stored. Further, the field corresponding to the field number 4 is associated with the effect section 4, and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 4 is stored. Further, the field corresponding to the field number 5 is associated with the effect section 5, and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 5 is stored. The field corresponding to the field number 6 is associated with the effect section 6 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 6 is stored. The field corresponding to the field number 7 is associated with the effect section 7 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 7 is stored. The field corresponding to the field number 8 is associated with the effect section 8 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 8 is stored. The field corresponding to the field number 9 is associated with the effect section 9 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 9 is stored. A field corresponding to the field number 10 is associated with the effect section 10, and a counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 10 is stored. Further, the field corresponding to the field number 11 is associated with the effect section 11, and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 11 is stored. Further, the field corresponding to the field number 12 is associated with the effect section 12, and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 12 is stored. Further, the field corresponding to the field number 13 is associated with the effect section 13 and the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section 13 is stored.

As described above, in each record included in the upper limit selection table corresponding to each operation device effect, one counter upper limit value is stored in each field included in the valid area, and each field included in the invalid area includes The counter upper limit value is not stored, but the invalid value INV is stored.
In the present embodiment, “0” (the minimum value among the possible values of the counter upper limit value) is stored as an invalid value INV in each field included in the invalid area.
In each operation device effect, an addition value is selected based on information stored in the effective area (specifically, the counter upper limit value). On the other hand, the added value is not selected based on the information stored in the invalid area (specifically, the invalid value INV).

In the present embodiment, a specified number of button scenarios (in the present embodiment, “11”) are defined as button scenarios corresponding to each operation device effect.
Specifically, “button scenario A1” to “button scenario A11” are defined as button scenarios corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect.
Further, “button scenario B1” to “button scenario B11” are defined as button scenarios corresponding to the chance-up effect.
Further, “button scenario C1” to “button scenario C11” are defined as button scenarios corresponding to the button notice effect.
The “button scenario” is information indicating the counter upper limit value corresponding to each performance section. That is, the button scenario corresponding to each operation device effect is information indicating the counter upper limit value corresponding to each effect section for all effect sections defined in the operation device effect.
Specifically, each button scenario ("button scenario A1" to "button scenario A11") corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect includes a counter upper limit value corresponding to each of the effect zone 1 to the effect zone 10. It consists of
On the other hand, each button scenario ("button scenario B1" to "button scenario B11") corresponding to the chance-up effect includes a counter upper limit value corresponding to each of the effect section 1 to the effect section 11. Yes.
On the other hand, each button scenario ("button scenario C1" to "button scenario C11") corresponding to the button notice effect includes a counter upper limit value corresponding to each of the effect sections 1 to 13. Yes.
In particular, in each button scenario, the counter upper limit value corresponding to the subsequent effect section of the two effect sections that are adjacent (continuous) to each other in time series is equal to the counter upper limit value corresponding to the previous effect section. The counter upper limit value corresponding to each effect section is defined so as to be the same value or a large value. That is, in each button scenario, the counter upper limit value corresponding to the effect section becomes larger in the later effect section.

In the upper limit selection table corresponding to each operation device effect, one button scenario is stored in each record.
Specifically, in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short time continuous judgment effect, “button scenario A1” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 1, and “button scenario A2” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 2. “Button scenario A3” is stored in the record corresponding to the record number 3, “button scenario A4” is stored in the record corresponding to the record number 4, and “ “Button scenario A5” is stored, “button scenario A6” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 6, “button scenario A7” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 7, and corresponding to record number 8 In the record, “button scenario A8” is stored, and in the record corresponding to record number 9 “ Down scenario A9 "is stored, the record corresponding to the record number 10," Button scenario A10 "is stored, the record corresponding to the record number 11," Button scenario A11 "is stored.
On the other hand, in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the chance up effect, “button scenario B1” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 1, and “button scenario B2” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 2, “Button scenario B3” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 3, “button scenario B4” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 4, and “button scenario B5” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 5. “Button scenario B6” is stored in the record corresponding to the record number 6, “button scenario B7” is stored in the record corresponding to the record number 7, and “ Button scenario B8 "is stored, and the button corresponding to record number 9 contains Oh B9 "is stored, the record corresponding to the record number 10," Button scenario B10 "is stored, the record corresponding to the record number 11," Button scenario B11 "is stored.
On the other hand, in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the button notice effect, “button scenario C1” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 1, “button scenario C2” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 2, “Button scenario C3” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 3, “button scenario C4” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 4, and “button scenario C5” is stored in the record corresponding to record number 5. “Button scenario C6” is stored in the record corresponding to the record number 6, “button scenario C7” is stored in the record corresponding to the record number 7, and “ “Button scenario C8” is stored, and “button scenario C8” 9 "is stored, the record corresponding to the record number 10," Button scenario C10 "is stored, the record corresponding to the record number 11," Button scenario C11 "is stored.
In particular, in each record, a button scenario is stored in the effective area. In other words, each button scenario is configured by information (data) stored in the effective area of each record.

“Button scenario A1” to “button scenario A8” are button scenarios that can be selected during the game. That is, “button scenario A1” to “button scenario A8” are button scenarios that can be selected in a button scenario selection process described later.
In “button scenario A1” to “button scenario A8”, the distribution of the counter upper limit values in the fields from field number 1 to field number 10 (the production section of “10”) is different from each other.
In particular, “button scenario A1” to “button scenario A4” are selected only when the current gaming state is “special figure low probability state” (when the type of the previous big hit gaming state is “big hit 6”). Can be done.
In “button scenario A1” to “button scenario A4”, the maximum value of the counter upper limit values included in the button scenario is smaller than a predetermined maximum value (“6” in the present embodiment). . Thus, when “button scenario A1” to “button scenario A4” are selected, the value of the production stage counter is made to reach a predetermined maximum value by the depression operation of the production button 5b during the operation valid period. Is impossible.
On the other hand, “button scenario A5” to “button scenario A8” are selected only when the current gaming state is “special figure high probability state” (when the type of the previous big hit gaming state is “big hit 5”). Can be done.
In “button scenario A5” to “button scenario A8”, the maximum value of the counter upper limit values included in the button scenario matches the predetermined maximum value (“6” in the present embodiment). As a result, when “button scenario A5” to “button scenario A8” are selected, the value of the effect stage counter reaches the predetermined maximum value by pressing the effect button 5b during the operation effective period. Is possible.
On the other hand, “button scenario A9” to “button scenario A11” are button scenarios that are not selected during the game. That is, “button scenario A9” to “button scenario A11” are debugging scenarios.
In particular, “button scenario A9” is a situation in which the value of the stage counter cannot reach a predetermined maximum value during the operation valid period. ) Is a button scenario to verify.
"Various effects" includes various effects (display effects, sound effects, lamp effects, movable object effects, etc.) that are executed at the same time as the short-time continuous judge effects (including the short-time continuous judge effects) The same).
On the other hand, “button scenario A10” verifies the operation of various effects (appropriateness of operation, consistency of operation, etc.) in the situation where the value of the effect stage counter reaches a predetermined maximum value early in the operation effective period. It is a button scenario to do.
In particular, “button scenario A10” is a button scenario for verifying whether the forcible processing is properly executed.
The “forced process” is the end of the operation valid period when the value of the production stage counter does not reach a predetermined maximum value due to an insufficient number of pressing operations of the production button 5b during the operation valid period (operation In accordance with the elapse of the effective time, the value of the effect stage counter is forcibly increased to a predetermined maximum value (in the case of a chance-up effect, the number of final lightings selected in advance).
On the other hand, the “button scenario A11” is for verifying the operations (appropriateness of operation, consistency of operations, etc.) of various effects in a situation where the value of the effect stage counter is not added during the operation valid period. It is a button scenario.

“Button scenario B1” to “button scenario B8” are button scenarios that can be selected during the game. That is, “button scenario B1” to “button scenario B8” are button scenarios that can be selected in a button scenario selection process described later.
In “button scenario B1” to “button scenario B8”, the distribution of the counter upper limit values in the fields from field number 1 to field number 11 (the production section of “11”) is different from each other.
On the other hand, “button scenario B9” to “button scenario B11” are button scenarios that are not selected during the game. That is, “button scenario B9” to “button scenario B11” are debugging scenarios.
In particular, “button scenario B9” is a situation in which the value of the stage counter cannot reach a predetermined maximum value during the operation valid period. ) Is a button scenario to verify.
On the other hand, “button scenario B10” verifies the operation of various effects (appropriateness of operation, consistency of operation, etc.) in the situation where the value of the effect stage counter reaches a predetermined maximum value early in the operation effective period. It is a button scenario to do.
In particular, the “button scenario B10” is a button scenario for verifying whether the forcible processing is properly executed.
On the other hand, the “button scenario B11” is for verifying the operations (appropriateness of operation, consistency of operations, etc.) of various effects in a situation where the value of the effect stage counter is not added during the operation valid period. It is a button scenario.

“Button scenario C1” to “button scenario C8” are button scenarios that can be selected during the game. That is, “button scenario C1” to “button scenario C8” are button scenarios that can be selected in a button scenario selection process described later.
In “button scenario C1” to “button scenario C8”, the distribution of the counter upper limit values in the fields from field number 1 to field number 13 (the production section of “13”) is different from each other.
In particular, “button scenario C1” to “button scenario C4” can be selected only when “super-reach variation” is not selected as the type of variation pattern.
In “button scenario C1” to “button scenario C4”, the maximum value of the counter upper limit values included in the button scenario is smaller than a predetermined maximum value (“10” in the present embodiment). . As a result, when “button scenario C1” to “button scenario C4” are selected, the value of the effect stage counter is made to reach a predetermined maximum value by pressing the effect button 5b during the operation effective period. Is impossible.
On the other hand, “button scenario C5” to “button scenario C8” can be selected only when “super reach variation” is selected as the type of variation pattern.
In “button scenario C5” to “button scenario C8”, the maximum value of the counter upper limit values included in the button scenario matches the predetermined maximum value (“10” in the present embodiment). As a result, when “button scenario C5” to “button scenario C8” are selected, the value of the effect stage counter reaches the predetermined maximum value by pressing the effect button 5b during the operation valid period. Is possible.
On the other hand, “button scenario C9” to “button scenario C11” are button scenarios that are not selected during the game. That is, “button scenario C9” to “button scenario C11” are debugging scenarios.
In particular, “button scenario C9” is a situation in which the value of the stage counter cannot reach a predetermined maximum value during the operation valid period. ) Is a button scenario to verify.
On the other hand, “button scenario C10” verifies the operation of various effects (appropriateness of operation, consistency of operation, etc.) in the situation where the value of the effect stage counter reaches a predetermined maximum value early in the operation effective period. It is a button scenario to do.
In particular, the “button scenario C10” is a button scenario for verifying whether the forcible processing is properly executed.
On the other hand, the “button scenario C11” is for verifying the operations (appropriateness of operation, consistency of operations, etc.) of various effects in a situation where the value of the effect stage counter is not added during the operation valid period. It is a button scenario.

When each operation device effect is executed, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the effect stage counter before the operation effective period is started.
Further, the table address referred to in the addition value selection process is set in the table address setting area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
At this time, when the short time continuous judgment effect is executed, the table address of the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short time continuous judgment effect is set in the table address setting area.
On the other hand, when the chance up effect is executed, the table address of the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance up effect is set in the table address setting area.
On the other hand, when the button notice effect is executed, the table address of the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the button notice effect is set in the table address setting area.
Further, the button scenario is selected, and the record number corresponding to the selected button scenario is set in the record number setting area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
At this time, when the short time continuous judgment effect is executed, one of the “button scenario A1” to “button scenario A8” is selected, and the record number corresponding to the selected button scenario is It is set in the record number setting area of the RAM of the control circuit 300.
On the other hand, when the chance up effect is executed, one button scenario is selected from “button scenario B1” to “button scenario B8”, and the record number corresponding to the selected button scenario is displayed in the effect control circuit. It is set in the record number setting area of 300 RAM.
On the other hand, when the button notice effect is executed, one button scenario is selected from “button scenario C1” to “button scenario C8”, and the record number corresponding to the selected button scenario is displayed in the effect control circuit. It is set in the record number setting area of 300 RAM.

In the counter upper limit value acquisition process, first, a table corresponding to the table address set in the table address setting area is selected as a table to be referenced.
At this time, the upper limit selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judge effect is selected during execution of the short-time continuous judge effect. On the other hand, during the execution of the chance up effect, the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance up effect is selected. On the other hand, during execution of the button notice effect, the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the button notice effect is selected.
Next, a record corresponding to the record number set in the record number setting area is selected from the records included in the selected table as a record to be referred to.
At this time, in this embodiment, a record corresponding to any one of record numbers 1 to 8 is selected (records corresponding to record number 9 to record number 11 are not selected). .
Next, a field number corresponding to the current operation valid elapsed time timer value (operation valid elapsed time T) is acquired.
At this time, any one of the field numbers 1 to 10 is acquired during execution of the short-time continuous judgment effect. On the other hand, during the execution of the chance up effect, one of the field numbers 1 to 11 is acquired. On the other hand, during execution of the button notice effect, one of the field numbers 1 to 13 is acquired.
Next, the field corresponding to the acquired field number is selected from the fields included in the selected record as a field to be referred to.
Then, the counter upper limit value stored in the selected field is acquired.

In the added value selection process, an addable value calculation process is then executed. In the addable value calculation process, an addable value is calculated.
The “addable value” is an upper limit value of the addition value that can be selected in the current addition value selection process.
The addable value is a value obtained by subtracting the value of the current stage stage counter from the counter upper limit value acquired in the counter upper limit value acquisition process (addable value = counter upper limit value−value of stage stage counter).

In the added value selection process, an added value lottery process is then executed. In the addition value lottery process, an addition value is selected by lottery. At this time, the same value or a smaller value is selected as the addition value with respect to the addable value calculated in the addable value calculation process.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores an addition value lottery table in which the correspondence between the addition value lottery random number and the addition value is registered.
Further, the addition value lottery table corresponds to the addition value lottery table corresponding to the addable value = “0”, the addition value lottery table corresponding to the addable value = “1”, and the addable value = “2”. An addition value lottery table and an addition value lottery table corresponding to values that can be added = “3” or more are registered.
In the addition value lottery table corresponding to the addable value = “0”, only “0” is registered as the addition value. As a result, when the addable value calculated by the addable value calculation process = “0”, “0” is selected as the added value.
On the other hand, “0” and “1” are registered as addition values in the addition value lottery table corresponding to the addable value = “1”. As a result, when the addable value calculated by the addable value calculation process = “1”, one value of “0” and “1” is selected as the added value.
On the other hand, “0”, “1”, and “2” are registered as addition values in the addition value lottery table corresponding to the addable value = “2”. As a result, when the addable value calculated by the addable value calculation process is “2”, one value of “0”, “1”, and “2” is selected as the added value. .
On the other hand, “0”, “1”, “2”, and “3” are registered as addition values in the addition value lottery table corresponding to values that can be added = “3” or more. As a result, when the addable value calculated by the addable value calculation process is a value equal to or greater than “3”, among the addition values “0”, “1”, “2”, and “3”, One value is selected.
In the addition value lottery process, first, an addition value lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, an addition value lottery table corresponding to the addable value calculated by the addable value calculation process is read. Then, the addition value is determined (selected) based on the acquired addition value lottery random number and the read addition value lottery table.

In the addition value selection process, next, an effect update process is executed. In the effect update process, the effect contents of the operation device effect are updated according to the added value selected in the added value lottery process.
In other words, the addition value selected in the addition value lottery process is added to the current value of the production stage counter. Then, the effect content of the operation device effect is updated to the content corresponding to the value of the effect stage counter after the addition.

For example, in the case where “short time continuous judgment effect” is executed and “button scenario A2” is selected as the button scenario, the table address of the upper limit selection table corresponding to the short time continuous judgment effect in the table address setting area Is set, and record number = “2” corresponding to “button scenario A2” is set in the record number setting area.
Thereby, in each addition value selection process, an addition value (effect content) is selected based on the record corresponding to the record number 2 among the records included in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect. .
For example, at the time when the measured value of the operation effective elapsed time timer (operation effective elapsed time T) = 0.6 [s] (assuming that the value of the effect stage counter at this time = “0”), the effect button 5b Is detected, field number = “2” corresponding to the time is acquired. Further, the counter upper limit value = “1” stored in the field corresponding to the acquired field number = “2” is acquired (see FIG. 42). Further, a value = “1”, which is obtained by subtracting the current stage counter value = “0” from the acquired counter upper limit value = “1”, is calculated as an addable value. Then, an added value is selected based on the calculated addable value = “1”. At this time, one value of “0” and “1” is selected as an addition value by lottery. Then, the selected addition value is added to the value of the current stage stage counter, and the content of the door image is updated to the contents corresponding to the value of the stage stage counter after the addition.
Thereafter, at the time when the measured value of the operation effective elapsed time timer (operation effective elapsed time T) = 4.1 [s] (the value of the effect stage counter at this time = “2”), the effect button 5b Is detected, field number = “9” corresponding to the time is acquired. Further, the counter upper limit value = “5” stored in the field corresponding to the acquired field number = “9” is acquired (see FIG. 42). Further, a value = “3”, which is obtained by subtracting the current stage counter value = “2” from the acquired counter upper limit value = “5”, is calculated as an addable value. Then, an added value is selected based on the calculated addable value = “3”. At this time, one value of “0”, “1”, “2”, and “3” is selected as an addition value by lottery. Then, the selected addition value is added to the value of the current stage stage counter, and the content of the door image is updated to the contents corresponding to the value of the stage stage counter after the addition.

(Processing executed by the effect control circuit 300)
Next, processing executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
The effect control circuit 300 is provided with a reset circuit (not shown). The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 starts a CPU initialization process (not shown) in response to the generation of a reset signal by the reset circuit.
When the CPU initialization process is started, first, various registers, various timers (frame timer, phase timer, etc.), clock pulse oscillator, various RAMs, etc. are initialized. Next, effect random number update processing for updating various effect random numbers is executed. Thereafter, the effect random number update process is repeatedly executed until various interrupt processes described later are executed.

In particular, the CPU initialization process includes a table initialization process. In the table initialization processing, table information is set for various tables that are referred to when various effects (variation effects, stop effects, pre-reading notice effects, main notice effects, etc.) are executed.
A table that is referred to when various effects are executed is stored in the ROM of the effect control circuit 300. Then, when the various effects are executed, the contents of the effects are controlled with reference to various tables stored in the ROM.
In the table initialization process, table information is set for various tables stored in the ROM.
“Table information” is information that defines the configuration of a table. The table information includes a maximum value of the number of rows in the table (the number of records included in the table), a maximum value of the number of columns in the table (the number of fields included in each record), and the like.
Then, in the table initialization process, table information corresponding to the various tables stored in the RAM is set in a predetermined region of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Here, table information corresponding to various tables is stored in the header area of the table. This makes it possible to refer to (access) the various tables stored in the ROM when performing various effects.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, the number of rows (maximum value of the number of rows) and the number of columns (maximum value of the number of columns) of the upper limit value selection tables are the same. That is, for the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short duration continuous judgment effect, the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance-up effect, and the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the button notice effect, the number of rows in the table (maximum number of rows)・ The number of columns (maximum number of columns) is the same.
Thus, in the table initialization process, it is possible to set table information using a common process (program) for all upper limit value selection tables.
Therefore, the table initialization process can be simplified.
In the present embodiment, the contents of the effects are controlled with reference to the various tables stored in the ROM when the various effects are executed. However, in the table initialization process, various tables stored in the ROM are expanded in the RAM, and when the various effects are executed, the contents of the effects are controlled by referring to the various tables expanded in the RAM. It doesn't matter.

Next, command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control circuit 200.
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control circuit 200 is stored (stored) in the reception buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

Next, sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-timer interrupt process.
The effect control circuit 300 includes a clock pulse generation circuit. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal every predetermined period.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 starts the sub-timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 35 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of the clock pulse by the clock pulse generation circuit. When the sub timer interrupt process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register saving process, the register value is saved in the saving area of the RAM.
In step S31-2, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, various timers provided in the effect control circuit 300 are updated.
In step S31-3, command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, a control command stored in the reception buffer of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is analyzed, and a process corresponding to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, a time schedule management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of each performance is managed.
Here, the ROM of the effect control circuit 300 corresponds to each effect (each aspect of the change effect, each aspect of the stop effect, each aspect of the notice effect, each aspect of the pre-reading notice effect, each aspect of the hold effect, etc.). An effect control table is stored.
The “effect control table” is information that defines the progress of the effects (display effects, sound effects, lamp effects, movable object effects, etc.).
In each effect control table, a plurality of process data are registered in time series. Each process data includes one or a plurality of command information. Each command information is a process of designating the start of a predetermined effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect or movable object effect). In particular, each command information includes information for specifying the contents of the effect to be started (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number, or movable object effect number).

In the time schedule management process, an effect control table corresponding to each effect set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and an effect management timer corresponding to the effect (the effect management timer for measuring the elapsed time of the effect) ) To manage the progress of the production.
Specifically, for each effect, a process based on the process data corresponding to the current value of the effect management timer among the process data registered in the effect control table is executed. Thereby, the command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In particular, when an effect control table corresponding to an operation device effect (short-time continuous judge effect, chance-up effect, button notice effect, etc.) is set, the above-described added value selection process is executed in the time schedule management process. The Specific contents of the added value selection process will be described later.

  In step S31-5, a register restoration process is executed, and the sub timer interrupt process is terminated. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S31-1 is restored.

Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process proceeds to step S32-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S32-1, a set value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the set value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a subcommand specifying a set value has been received. If it is determined that the subcommand specifying the setting value is received, the setting value specified by the subcommand is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S32-2, a game state command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the gaming state command reception process, it is determined whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received. And when it determines with having received the game state designation | designated command, the setting of various effect flags is performed.
In step S32-3, a hold command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. The hold command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, prefetch command reception processing is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S32-5. The prefetch command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-5, a variable command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. The variable command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-6, stop command reception processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step S31-4). The stop command reception process will be described later.

Next, the hold command reception process in step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a hold command reception process.
When the hold command reception process is executed in step S32-3, the process proceeds to step S36-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not a hold number designation command has been received. If it is determined that a hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2, and the hold number designation command is changed. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command designates an increase in the hold number (that the hold number has increased by “1”), and the hold number designation command designates an increase in the hold number. If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and the hold number designation command does not designate an increase in the hold number (designates that the hold number has decreased by “1”). When it determines (No), it transfers to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, the number-of-holds addition process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 hold number.
If it is determined that the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 hold number, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly set. Special figure 1 Set to the number of hold counter. In addition, a normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 1 start information is set.
For this, the effect control table corresponding to the normal hold effect is read, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, a storage unit (first storage unit) in which newly acquired special figure 1 start information is stored among the four display positions included in the reserved symbol display region b2. Display position corresponding to .about.fourth storage unit) is set. Here, the memory | storage part (1st memory | storage part-4th memory | storage part) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 starting information is memorize | stored is determined based on the value of a special figure 1 hold | maintenance number counter.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 2 hold number, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly set. Special figure 2 Set to the number-of-holds counter. In addition, a normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 2 start information is set.
For this, the effect control table corresponding to the normal hold effect is read, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, a storage unit (first storage unit) in which newly acquired special figure 2 start information is stored among the four display positions included in the reserved symbol display region b3. Display position corresponding to .about.fourth storage unit) is set. Here, the memory | storage part (1st memory | storage part-4th memory | storage part) in which the newly acquired special figure 2 starting information is memorize | stored is determined based on the value of a special figure 2 reservation number counter.

In step S36-4, the number-of-holds subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies subtraction of the special figure 1 hold number.
If it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number subtraction is specified by the hold number designation command, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly set. Special figure 1 Set to the number of hold counter. Further, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the holding effect corresponding to the holding symbol h displayed in the holding symbol display area b1 is terminated. Thereby, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the ended hold effect is ended.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is set to the reserved symbol display area b2 (in the first storage unit). The corresponding display position is changed (shifted) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
In addition, when the hold symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the second storage unit in the hold symbol display area b2, the display position of the hold symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the second storage unit to the second display unit b2. Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to one storage unit.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the third storage unit to the second display unit b2. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
In addition, when the holding symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit in the holding symbol display area b2, the display position of the holding symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit to the second display unit b2. 3. Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold number designation command specifies subtraction of the special figure 2 hold number, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly set. Special figure 2 Set to the number-of-holds counter. In addition, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the holding effect corresponding to the holding symbol h displayed in the holding symbol display area b1 is terminated. Thereby, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the ended hold effect is ended.
In addition, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is set to the reserved symbol display area b3 (in the first storage unit). The corresponding display position is changed (shifted) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
In addition, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the second storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the second storage unit to the second display unit b3. Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to one storage unit.
In addition, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the third storage unit to the second display unit b3. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
In addition, when the holding symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit in the holding symbol display area b3, the display position of the holding symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit to the second display unit b3. 3. Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.

Next, the prefetch command reception process in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing prefetch command reception processing.
When the prefetch command reception process is executed in step S32-4, the process proceeds to step S33-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a prefetch designation command (first prefetch designation command, second prefetch designation command and third prefetch designation command) has been received, and if it is determined that a prefetch designation command has been received (Yes) ), The process proceeds to step S33-2, and if it is determined that the prefetch designation command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, a prefetch information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the prefetch information analysis process, information designated by the prefetch designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 as the hold information.
In the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, a hold information storage area capable of storing hold information is set. In addition, as a reserved information storage area, a first reserved information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (Special Figure 1 start information storage area of the RAM 230) and a second special symbol lottery (Special Figure 2 start information storage area of the RAM 230). ) Corresponding to the second hold information storage area.
The first hold information storage area includes a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit as a storage unit capable of storing the hold information. In the first hold information storage area, hold information corresponding to the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the first storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the second storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the second storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the third storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the third storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the fourth storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area.
The second hold information storage area includes a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit as a storage unit capable of storing the hold information. In the second hold information storage area, hold information corresponding to the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the first storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the second storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 start information stored in the second storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the third storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 start information stored in the third storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 start information stored in the fourth storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area.
Each hold information includes symbol information indicating the type of stop symbol, first variation information indicating the content of the variation mode (“variation mode number” or “undefined value”), and the content of the variation pattern (“variation pattern number” or Second variation information indicating “indefinite value”).

In the prefetch information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first prefetch designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
When it is determined that the received first prefetching designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first prefetching designation command (“missing symbol” or “hit p symbol” )), The contents of the fluctuation mode designated by the second prefetch designation command ("fluctuation mode m" or "undefined value"), and the contents of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third prefetch designation command ("fluctuation pattern n" or " Indefinite value "), the symbol information corresponding to the analyzed stop symbol type, the first variation information corresponding to the analyzed variation mode content, and the second corresponding to the analyzed variation pattern content Hold information including fluctuation information is generated. Then, the generated hold information is stored (saved) in the first hold information storage area.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received first prefetching designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first prefetching designation command (“missing symbol” or “hit p symbol” )), The contents of the fluctuation mode designated by the second prefetch designation command ("fluctuation mode m" or "undefined value"), and the contents of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third prefetch designation command ("fluctuation pattern n" or " Indefinite value "), the symbol information corresponding to the analyzed stop symbol type, the first variation information corresponding to the analyzed variation mode content, and the second corresponding to the analyzed variation pattern content Hold information including fluctuation information is generated. Then, the generated hold information is stored (saved) in the second hold information storage area.
In the following description, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as “prefetch target hold information”. Further, among the hold information stored in the first hold information storage area, the hold information for which notification display (variable display and stop display) is executed before the prefetch target hold information is referred to as “preceding hold information”.

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect is being executed. If it is determined that the prefetching notice effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4 and the prefetching notice effect is displayed. If it is determined that the process is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, “1” is set in the prefetching notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 during execution of the prefetching notice effect. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect is being executed based on whether or not “1” is set in the prefetching notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. .
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect execution condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the prefetching notice effect execution condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and the prefetching notice effect execution condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, (1) the prefetch target hold information is the hold information corresponding to the special figure 1 start information, and (2) the predecessor hold information of a predetermined number (“2” in the present embodiment) or more is stored. (3) No preceding hold information indicating the type (variation pattern number) belonging to “normal reach fluctuation” or “super reach fluctuation” as the type of fluctuation pattern, and (4) the time-saving control is stopped. It is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied when all conditions of (5) that the big hit gaming state is not occurring are satisfied.
Note that the contents of the pre-reading notice effect execution condition can be changed as appropriate. In other words, not all of the above conditions (1) to (5) but a condition in which it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied when one or more of the above conditions (1) to (5) are satisfied. It doesn't matter. Further, as the pre-reading notice effect execution condition, other conditions different from the above conditions (1) to (5) may be included.

In step S33-5, a pre-reading notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the prefetching notice effect lottery process, a prefetching notice effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the prefetch notice effect is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a prefetching notice effect lottery table in which the winning value of the prefetching notice effect lottery is registered.
In the prefetching notice effect lottery process, first, a prefetching notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the acquired prefetching notice effect lottery random number and the prefetching notice effect lottery table, it is determined whether to execute the prefetching notice effect.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won. If it is determined that the prefetching notice effect lottery has been won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-7. If it is determined that it has been lost in the pre-reading notice effect lottery (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step 33-7, a pre-reading notice effect setting process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the prefetching notice effect setting process, the contents of the prefetching notice effect (holding notice effect) are set.
Specifically, in the prefetch notice effect setting process, first, a hold final mode selection process is executed. In the hold final mode selection process, the hold final mode is selected and set.
The “holding final mode” refers to a mode of the notice target holding symbol hy that finally changes in the holding notice effect.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a hold final color lottery table in which correspondence between the hold final mode lottery random number and the hold final mode is registered.
In addition, a hold final mode lottery table corresponding to each type of variation pattern is stored as the hold final mode lottery table.
In the hold final mode selection process, first, a hold final mode lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of the variation pattern indicated by the prefetch target hold information is confirmed, and the hold final mode lottery table corresponding to the check result is read. Then, the final hold mode is selected (determined) based on the acquired final hold mode lottery random number and the read final hold mode lottery table.

Next, in the pre-reading notice effect setting process, a hold change opportunity selection process is executed. In the hold change opportunity selection process, a hold change opportunity is selected and set.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a hold change opportunity lottery table in which correspondences between hold change opportunity lottery random numbers and hold change patterns are registered.
The “holding change pattern” is information (scenario data) for specifying a combination of the holding change triggers.
In addition, a hold change opportunity lottery table corresponding to each combination of the special figure 1 hold number ("2" to "4") and the hold final mode is stored as the hold change opportunity lottery table.
In the hold change opportunity selection process, first, a hold change opportunity lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Moreover, the number of special figure 1 hold | maintenance and the hold | maintenance last aspect selected by the hold | maintenance last aspect selection process are confirmed, and the hold | maintenance change opportunity lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, a hold change pattern is determined (determined) based on the acquired hold change trigger lottery random number and the read hold change trigger lottery table. Then, according to the determined hold change pattern, one or more hold change triggers related to the hold notice effect are set.

In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, next, a pending change content selection process is executed. In the hold change content selection process, the hold change content corresponding to each hold change opportunity is selected and set.
Specifically, in the pending change content selection process, as the pending change content corresponding to each pending change opportunity, the mode of the advance notice target hold symbol hy before the change and the mode of the advance notice target hold symbol hy after the change are: Is set.
In this embodiment, among one or more hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger selection process, each hold is performed in order from the hold change trigger (later hold change trigger) that arrives (occurs) later. The pending change content corresponding to the change opportunity is selected.
For example, when a hold change opportunity of 3 [times] is set in the hold change opportunity selection process, a third (last) hold change opportunity, a second hold change opportunity, and a first hold change opportunity are arranged in this order. Then, the hold change content corresponding to each hold change opportunity is selected.
Further, when selecting the hold change content corresponding to each hold change opportunity, first the aspect of the notice target hold symbol hy after the change is selected, and then the form of the notice target hold symbol hy before the change is selected. Selected. At this time, a mode with a low expectation is determined as a mode of the notification target reserved symbol hy before the change, compared with a mode of the notification target reserved symbol hy after the change. Thereby, according to the arrival of the hold change opportunity of each time, the aspect of the notice target hold symbol hy is changed (promoted) to a form with high expectation.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a pending change content lottery table in which correspondences between the pending change content lottery random numbers and the mode of the notice target pending symbol hy before change are registered.
In addition, a hold change content lottery table corresponding to each mode of the hold symbol h (a mode of the notification target hold symbol hy after the change) is stored as the hold change content lottery table.
Then, in the pending change content lottery table corresponding to each aspect of the reserved symbol h (the aspect of the notice target reserved symbol hy after the change), the notice target reserved symbol hy after the change is set as the aspect of the notice subject reserved symbol hy before the change. Only the mode with low expectation is registered as compared with the above mode.
In the pending change content selection processing, first, the pending change content is selected for the last pending change timing among the pending change timings set in the pending change timing selection processing. In order to do this, first, the mode of the notice target reserved symbol hy after the change related to the last change change opportunity is selected. At this time, the final hold mode selected in the final hold mode selection process is selected as the post-change notice target hold symbol hy related to the final hold change opportunity. Next, the aspect of the notice subject hold symbol hy before the change related to the last hold change opportunity is selected. For this purpose, first, a pending change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the holding change content lottery table corresponding to the mode of the notice target holding symbol hy after the change selected for the last holding change opportunity is read. Then, based on the acquired hold change content lottery random number and the read hold change content lottery table, the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy before the change related to the last hold change opportunity is selected.
In the hold change content selection process, next, the hold change contents are selected for each hold change opportunity except for the last hold change trigger among the hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger selection process. At this time, the hold change content corresponding to each hold change trigger is determined in order from the hold change trigger that comes later.
In order to determine the hold change content corresponding to each hold change trigger, first, the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy after the change related to the hold change trigger is determined. At this time, as the mode of the notice target reserved symbol hy after the change related to the current hold change trigger, the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy before the change already selected for the next hold change trigger is selected. Next, the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy before the change related to the hold change opportunity this time is determined. For this purpose, first, a pending change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the holding change content lottery table corresponding to the mode of the notification target holding symbol hy after the change selected for the current holding change opportunity is read. Then, based on the acquired hold change content lottery random number and the read hold change content lottery table, the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy before change related to the current hold change opportunity is selected.
In the pending change content selection process, next, the pending change content selected for each pending change trigger is set in association with the pending change trigger. As a result, according to the arrival of each hold change opportunity, the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy changes (promotes) according to the hold change content set for the hold change trigger.

In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, next, “1” is set in the pre-reading notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
Thus, the hold notice effect is started.
Note that “0” is set in the pre-reading notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in accordance with the end of the hold notice effect by a process not shown.

Next, the variable command reception process in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the variable command reception process.
When the variable command reception process is executed in step S32-5, the process proceeds to step S34-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether a predetermined control command has been received. If it is determined that the predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2, and the predetermined control command is changed. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control commands are a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, a stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, a stop effect mode (stop effect number) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, the stop effect mode (stop effect number) is determined based on the stop symbol type specified by the symbol type specifying command. Then, the determined stop production number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the production control circuit 300.

In step S34-3, a variation effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variation effect determination process, a variation effect mode (variation effect number) is determined.
Specifically, in the variation effect determination process, first, a first variation effect determination process for determining the mode (variation effect number) of the first variation effect is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a first variation effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation mode type (variation mode number) and the first variation effect mode (variation effect number) is registered. .
In the first variation effect determination process, first, the first variation effect lottery table is read. The first variation effect corresponding to the variation mode type (variation mode number) designated by the variation mode designation command among the first variation effect modes (variation effect numbers) registered in the first variation effect lottery table. The mode is determined (selected).

In the variation effect determination process, next, a second variation effect determination process for determining a mode (variation effect number) of the second variation effect is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a second variation effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) and the second variation effect mode (variation effect number) is registered. .
In the second variation effect determination process, first, the second variation effect lottery table is read. The second variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) specified by the variation pattern designation command among the second variation effect modes (variation effect numbers) registered in the second variation effect lottery table. The mode is determined (selected).

In the variation effect determination process, a time-saving continuation judge effect setting process is then executed.
In the time-continuous judgment effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the started variation effect corresponds to the specific variation effect. And when it determines with the variation | change effect to be started correspond to a specific variation | change effect, it determines to perform a time-short continuous judgment effect. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation effect to be started does not correspond to the specific variation effect, it is determined not to execute the time-saving continuous judgment effect.
At this time, the type of the previous big hit gaming state is “big hit 5” or “big hit 6”, and the variation effect to be started is the 100th variation effect executed after the end of the previous big hit gaming state. In some cases, it is determined that the variation effect to be started corresponds to the specific variation effect.
If it is decided to execute the short time continuous judgment effect, the button scenario selection process is executed. In the button scenario selection process, a button scenario for a short-time continuous judgment effect is selected.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a button scenario lottery table in which correspondences between button scenario lottery random numbers and button scenarios are registered.
In addition, as the button scenario lottery table, the first type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect, the second type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the chance up effect, and the third type button scenario corresponding to the button notice effect. A lottery table is stored.
Further, as the first type button scenario lottery table, the first type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the case where the type of the previous big hit gaming state is “big hit 5”, and the type of the previous big hit gaming state is “big hit 6”. And a first type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the above case is stored.
“Button scenario A5” to “button scenario A8” are registered as button scenarios in the first type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the case where the type of the previous jackpot gaming state is “big hit 5”. Thereby, when the type of the previous big hit gaming state is “big hit 5”, any one of “button scenario A5” to “button scenario A8” is selected as the button scenario.
“Button scenario A1” to “button scenario A4” are registered as button scenarios in the first type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the case where the type of the previous jackpot gaming state is “big hit 6”. Accordingly, when the type of the previous jackpot gaming state is “Big Jack 6”, any one of the “button scenarios A1” to “button scenario A4” is selected as the button scenario.
In the button scenario selection process, first, a button scenario lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the type of the previous big hit gaming state is confirmed, and the first type button scenario lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, a button scenario is selected (determined) based on the acquired button scenario lottery random number and the read first type button scenario lottery table.

Next, in the variation effect determination process, a chance up effect setting process is executed.
In the chance-up effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a “special figure high probability state”. If it is determined that the current gaming state is the “special figure high probability state”, the type of the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is further set to a specific type (specifically, “super reach”). It is determined whether or not it is “variation 1” or “super reach variation 2”).
If it is determined that the current gaming state is the “special figure high probability state” and the type of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a specific type, a chance-up effect is executed. Decide that.
When it is determined to execute the chance up effect, the button scenario selection process is executed.
In the button scenario selection process, first, the final lighting number is selected.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a final lighting number lottery table in which the correspondence between the final lighting number lottery random number and the final lighting number (“0” to “4”) is registered.
Also, as the final lighting number lottery table, the final lighting number lottery table corresponding to the case where the stop symbol type is “big hit symbol”, and the final lighting number lottery corresponding to the case where the stop symbol type is “out of symbol”. A table is stored.
Then, in the descending order of the jackpot expectation of each final lighting number, the final lighting number = “4”, the final lighting number = “3”, the final lighting number = “2”, and the final lighting number = “ The contents of each final lighting number lottery table are defined such that “1” and final lighting number = “0” (high expectation level for big hit → low expected level for big hit)
In order to select the final lighting number, first, the final lighting number lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the type of the stop symbol designated by the symbol type designation command is confirmed, and the final lighting number lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the final lighting number is selected (determined) based on the acquired final lighting number lottery random number and the read final lighting number lottery table.
In the button scenario selection process, next, a button scenario for a chance-up effect is selected.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a second type button scenario lottery table corresponding to each final lighting number (“0” to “4”) as a second type button scenario lottery table.
In the second type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the final lighting number = “4”, “button scenario B6” to “button scenario B8” are registered as button scenarios.
On the other hand, “button scenario B4” and “button scenario B5” are registered as button scenarios in the second type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the final lighting number = “3”.
On the other hand, “button scenario B3” is registered as a button scenario in the second type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the final lighting number = “2”.
On the other hand, “button scenario B2” is registered as a button scenario in the second type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the final lighting number = “1”.
On the other hand, “button scenario B1” is registered as the button scenario in the second type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the final lighting number = “0”.
To select a button scenario, first, a button scenario lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the final lighting number selected is confirmed, and the second type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, a button scenario is selected (determined) based on the acquired button scenario lottery random number and the read second type button scenario lottery table.

In step S34-4, a notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the notice effect determination process, the mode of the main notice effect is selected.
In particular, in the notice effect determination process, the button scenario selection process is executed when the button notice effect is selected as the mode of the main notice effect.
In the button scenario selection process, a button scenario for button notice effect is selected.
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, as the third type button scenario lottery table, the third type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is “super reach variation” and the variation pattern type “super” A third type button scenario lottery table corresponding to a case other than “reach fluctuation” is stored.
Then, “button scenario C5” to “button scenario C8” are registered as button scenarios in the third type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the case where the type of the variation pattern is “super reach variation”.
On the other hand, in the third type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is other than “super reach variation”, “button scenario C1” to “button scenario C4” are included as button scenarios. It is registered.
In the button scenario selection process, first, a button scenario lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is confirmed, and the third type button scenario lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, a button scenario is selected (determined) based on the acquired button scenario lottery random number and the read third type button scenario lottery table.

In step S34-5, a variation effect setting process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variation effect setting process, an effect control table for the variation effect is set.
Specifically, in the variation effect setting process, the effect control table corresponding to the first variation effect mode (variation effect number) determined in step S34-3 and the second variation effect mode determined in step S34-3. An effect control table corresponding to (variable effect number) is read out.
Next, the effect control tables that have been read out are combined to generate an effect control table related to the change effect. Then, the generated effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the fluctuating effect is started.

  If it is determined in step S34-3 to execute the time-continuous judgment effect, the effect control table corresponding to the time-continuous judgment effect is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. In addition, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the effect stage counter. Further, 5.0 [s] is set as the predetermined operation effective time. In addition, in the table address setting area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the table address of the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short time continuous judge effect is set. Further, the record number corresponding to the button scenario selected in step S34-3 is set in the record number setting area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the time-saving continuous judge effect is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect. Then, every time a press operation of the effect button 5b is detected during the operation effective period in the short-time continuous judgment effect, the table address set in the table address setting area and the record number set in the record number setting area Based on the above, an addition value (effect content) is selected.

  If it is determined in step S34-3 to execute the chance up effect, the effect control table corresponding to the chance up effect is read out. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. In addition, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the effect stage counter. In addition, 5.5 [s] is set as the predetermined operation effective time. Further, the table address of the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance up effect is set in the table address setting area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Furthermore, the record number corresponding to the button scenario selected in step S34-3 is set in the record number setting area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the chance-up effect is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect. Then, every time a press operation of the effect button 5b is detected during the operation valid period in the chance up effect, the table address set in the table address setting area and the record number set in the record number setting area Based on, an added value (effect content) is selected.

  Further, when the button notice effect is selected as the main notice effect in step S34-4, the effect control table corresponding to the button notice effect is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. In addition, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the effect stage counter. In addition, 6.5 [s] is set as the predetermined operation effective time. Further, the table address of the upper limit selection table corresponding to the button notice effect is set in the RAM table address setting area of the effect control circuit 300. Furthermore, the record number corresponding to the button scenario selected in step S34-4 is set in the record number setting area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Accordingly, the button notice effect is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the change effect. Each time a press operation of the effect button 5b is detected during the operation valid period in the button notice effect, the table address set in the table address setting area and the record number set in the record number setting area Based on, an added value (effect content) is selected.

Next, stop command reception processing in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, the process proceeds to step S35-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not a stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that a stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2 and the stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is not (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, a stop effect setting process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect setting process, an effect control table for stop effect is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, an effect control table corresponding to the stop effect number determined in step S34-2 is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, a stop effect is started.
Here, in the stop effect, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol that were temporarily stopped at the end of the variation effect are stopped and displayed.

Next, the addition value selection process executed in the time schedule management process in step S31-4 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the addition value selection process.
In the added value selection process, during the operation device effect (short-time continuation judge effect, chance-up effect, or button notice effect), the content of the effect is detected according to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the operation valid period. It is a process for updating.
During the operation valid period, each time the time schedule management process is executed, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is detected (whether or not the first operation signal is input). At this time, if it is determined that the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is detected, an addition value selection process is executed.
When the addition value selection process is executed, the process proceeds to step S41-1, as shown in FIG.

In step S41-1, an operation effective elapsed time acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-2. In the operation effective elapsed time acquisition process, the current measurement value of the operation effective elapsed time timer (= operation effective elapsed time T) is acquired.
In step S41-2, it is determined whether or not the operation effective elapsed time T acquired in step 41-1 is within the set operation effective time (operation effective time set in step S34-5). When it is determined that the acquired operation effective elapsed time T is within the set operation effective time (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-3, where the acquired operation effective elapsed time T is When it determines with it not being in the range of the set operation effective time (No), it transfers to step S41-10.
In step S41-3, it is determined whether or not the record number set in the record number setting area (the record number set in step S34-5) is within a predetermined maximum value range. Is determined to be within the range of the predetermined maximum value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-4, and it is determined that the set record number is not within the range of the predetermined maximum value. If (No), the process proceeds to step S41-10.
At this time, based on the table information set in the table initialization process, it is determined whether or not the set record number is within a predetermined maximum value range.
That is, in the table initialization process, “11” is set as the maximum value of the number of rows in the table (the number of records included in the table) for the upper limit value selection table corresponding to each operation device effect.
Therefore, when the set record number is a value equal to or less than “11”, it is determined that the set record number is within a predetermined maximum value range, and the set record number is “ If the value is greater than “11”, it is determined that the set record number is not within the range of the predetermined maximum value.

In step S41-4, a counter upper limit value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-5. In the counter upper limit value acquisition process, the counter upper limit value is acquired.
Specifically, in the counter upper limit value acquisition process, first, a table corresponding to the table address set in the table address setting area (the table address set in step S34-5) is selected as a table to be referenced.
At this time, the upper limit selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judge effect is selected during execution of the short-time continuous judge effect. On the other hand, during the execution of the chance up effect, the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance up effect is selected. On the other hand, during execution of the button notice effect, the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the button notice effect is selected.
Next, a record corresponding to the record number set in the record number setting area (the record number set in step S34-5) is selected from the records included in the selected table as a record to be referred to.
At this time, in the present embodiment, a record corresponding to one of the record numbers 1 to 8 is selected.
Next, the field number corresponding to the operation effective elapsed time T acquired in step S41-1 is acquired. That is, the field number corresponding to the effect section to which the operation effective elapsed time T acquired in step S41-1 belongs is acquired.
At this time, any one of the field numbers 1 to 10 is acquired during execution of the short-time continuous judgment effect. On the other hand, during the execution of the chance up effect, one of the field numbers 1 to 11 is acquired. On the other hand, during execution of the button notice effect, one of the field numbers 1 to 13 is acquired.
Next, the field corresponding to the acquired field number is selected from the fields included in the selected record as a field to be referred to.
Then, the counter upper limit value stored in the selected field is acquired. Then, the acquired counter upper limit value is set in the current counter upper limit value setting area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S41-5, the value set in the current counter upper limit value setting area (the counter upper limit value acquired in the current addition value selection process) is the value set in the previous counter upper limit value setting area (the previous counter upper limit value setting process). It is determined whether or not the counter upper limit value acquired in the addition value selection process is equal to or greater than the value set in the counter upper limit value setting area this time or more. If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-6, where it is determined that the value set in the current counter upper limit value setting area is less than the value set in the previous counter upper limit value setting area. If (No), the process proceeds to step S41-10.
In step S41-6, it is determined whether or not the value set in the current counter upper limit value setting area is an invalid value, and when it is determined that the set value is not an invalid value (No). When the process proceeds to step S41-7 and it is determined that the set value is an invalid value (Yes), the current addition value selection process is terminated.

In step S41-7, an addable value calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-8. In the addable value calculation process, an addable value is calculated.
Specifically, in the addable value calculation process, the addable value is calculated by subtracting the current value of the stage stage counter from the value set in the current counter upper limit value setting area.
In step S41-8, an addition value lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-9. In the addition value lottery process, an addition value is selected.
Specifically, in the addition value lottery process, first, an addition value lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the addition value lottery table corresponding to the addable value calculated in step S41-7 is read. Then, the addition value is determined (selected) based on the acquired addition value lottery random number and the read addition value lottery table.
In step S41-9, the effect update process is executed, and the current addition value selection process is terminated. In the effect update process, the effect contents of the operation device effect are updated.
Specifically, in the effect update process, first, the addition value selected in step S41-8 is added to the value of the current effect stage counter.
Next, the contents corresponding to the value of the effect stage counter after the addition are set as the effect contents of the operation device effect. As a result, the contents of the operation device effect are updated.
Next, the value set in the current counter upper limit value setting area is set in the previous counter upper limit value setting area.
In step S41-10, an invalid value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-6. In the invalid value setting process, a predetermined invalid value is set in the current counter upper limit value setting area.

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the capacity of the upper limit value selection table is the same for all operation device effects.
That is, the capacity of the upper limit value selection table is the same in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect, the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance up effect, and the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the button notice effect. It has become.
Specifically, the number of records included in the upper limit value selection table (the number of stored button scenarios) includes an upper limit value selection table corresponding to a short-time continuous judgment effect, an upper limit value selection table corresponding to a chance-up effect, and a button notice. This is the same as the upper limit selection table corresponding to the performance.
In addition, the number of fields included in each record is as follows: an upper limit selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect, an upper limit selection table corresponding to the chance up effect, and an upper limit selection table corresponding to the button notice effect. It is the same.
Furthermore, the capacity of each field is the same in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect, the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance-up effect, and the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the button notice effect. Yes.
As described above, the number of rows (maximum value of the number of rows) and the number of columns (maximum value of the number of columns) are the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect, and the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance-up effect. The upper limit value selection table corresponding to the button notice effect is the same.
Thus, in the table initialization process, it is possible to set table information (define a table) using a common process (program) for the upper limit value selection table corresponding to all operation device effects.
Further, it is possible to select an added value (effect contents) for all operation device effects using a common process (program). That is to say, with the addition value selection process shown in FIG. 41, it is possible to select an addition value (effect contents) for all operation device effects.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, each record included in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judgment effect includes an effective area and an invalid area. Similarly, each record included in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the chance-up effect includes an effective area and an invalid area.
Then, based on the information (counter upper limit value) stored in the valid area, an addition value (effect content) is selected, and based on the information (invalid value INV) described in the invalid area, the addition value (effect) Content) is never selected.
As a result, even if a plurality of operation device effects (short-time continuous judge effect, chance up effect, and button notice effect) with different numbers of effect sections (operation effective time) are specified, all the operation devices About production, the capacity of the upper limit selection table (each record) can be made the same.
That is, the number of effect sections defined in the short-time continuous judge effect is smaller than the number of effect sections defined in the button notice effect. Therefore, by selecting the capacity of the invalid area (the number of fields included in the invalid area) in each record included in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the short-time continuous judge effect, the upper limit value corresponding to the short-time continuous judge effect is selected. Match the capacity of each record included in the table (the number of fields included in each record) to the capacity of each record included in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the button notice effect (the number of fields included in each record). Can do.
Similarly, the number of effect sections defined in the chance up effect is smaller than the number of effect sections defined in the button notice effect. Therefore, in each record included in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance up effect, by adjusting the capacity of the invalid area (the number of fields included in the invalid area), the upper limit value selection table corresponding to the chance up effect is displayed. The capacity of each record (number of fields included in each record) can be matched to the capacity of each record (number of fields included in each record) included in the upper limit selection table corresponding to the button notice effect. .
That is, in the upper limit value selection table (each record) corresponding to each operation device effect, the capacity of the invalid area (the field included in the invalid area) according to the operation valid period (operation valid time) corresponding to the operation device effect. Number). At this time, the longer the operation valid period (operation valid time), the larger the capacity of the invalid area (the number of fields included in the invalid area increases). In other words, the shorter the operation effective period (operation effective time), the smaller the capacity of the invalid area (the number of fields included in the invalid area decreases).
As described above, the capacities of the upper limit value selection tables (each record) can be made the same for all the operation device effects.
Therefore, various processes (a process for setting table information, a process for selecting the content of the operation device effect, etc.) can be made common to all the operation device effects.
Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process for executing the operation device effect.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, a button scenario for debugging is included in the button scenario stored in the upper limit value selection table corresponding to each operation device effect.
As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of debugging programs (codes), and it is possible to verify the operations of various effects with the processing content close to that of the actual machine.
In other words, in the pachinko machine 1, as a debugging program, it is only necessary to create a program that forces the button scenario for debugging to be selected in the lottery for selecting the button scenario. Can be verified.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of debugging programs compared to the case where a program that defines all processes executed during the operation valid period is created as a debugging program, and is closer to the actual machine. It is possible to verify the operations of various effects based on the processing content.

(Modification 1)
As mentioned above, although embodiment of this invention was described, in the said embodiment, a various change is possible.
For example, in the above embodiment, the capacities of the upper limit value selection tables are the same for all operation device effects. That is, the configuration of the upper limit value selection table (the number of records, the number of fields included in each record, and the capacity of each field) is the same for all operation device effects.
However, if the capacities of the upper limit selection tables are the same for at least some operation device effects (at least two operation device effects), the above-described effect can be achieved. That is, for at least some operation device effects (at least two operation device effects), the configuration of the upper limit value selection table (the number of records, the number of fields included in each record, and the capacity of each field) is the same. If so, the above effects can be achieved.

(Modification 2)
Moreover, in the said embodiment, only the operation device effect which uses the effect button 5b as an operation means is prescribed | regulated.
However, a plurality of operation device effects using different operation means may be defined as the operation device effects. In this case, a plurality of operation device effects having different contents may be defined as operation device effects using each operation means.
For example, as the operation device effect, an operation device effect using the effect button 5b as the operation means, an operation device effect using the operation handle as the operation means, an operation device effect using the operation lever as the operation means, and the like are defined.
In addition, as an operation device effect that uses the effect button 5b as an operation means, a short-time continuous judge effect, a chance-up effect, a button notice effect, and the like are defined.
On the other hand, an operation device effect a to an operation device effect e are defined as operation device effects using an operation handle as an operation means.
On the other hand, an operation device effect A to an operation device effect E are defined as operation device effects using the operation lever as the operation means.
For a plurality of operation device effects using the same operation means, the upper limit value selection table has the same configuration (number of records, number of fields included in each record, and capacity of each field), and different operation means For the operation device effect that uses, the configuration of the upper limit value selection table (number of records, number of fields included in each record, and capacity of each field) may be varied.
For example, the configuration of the upper limit value selection table is the same for the short-time continuation judgment effect, the chance-up effect, and the button notice effect, and the configuration of the upper limit value selection table is the same for the operation device effect a to the operation device effect e. The configuration of the upper limit value selection table is the same for the device effect A to the operation device effect E. On the other hand, the configuration of the upper limit selection table is made different between the short-time continuous judgment effect, the chance-up effect, the button notice effect, the operation device effect a to the operation device effect e, and the operation device effect A to the operation device effect E. .
Alternatively, the configuration of the upper limit value selection table may be the same for a plurality of operation device effects using different operation means.
For example, the configuration of the upper limit value selection table is the same for the time duration continuation judgment effect, the operation device effect a, and the operation device effect A.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the above embodiment, the operation is effective in the short-time judgment effect that is executed when the current gaming state is the “special figure high probability state” (when the type of the previous big hit gaming state is “big hit 5”). Even when the value of the effect stage counter does not reach the predetermined maximum value due to insufficient number of pressing operations of the effect button 5b during the period, the operation effective period ends (operation effective time In accordance with (elapsed), the value of the production stage counter is forcibly increased to a predetermined maximum value, and the production content changes to the value of the production stage counter after the increase.
Similarly, in the chance-up effect, when the value of the effect stage counter does not reach the preselected final lighting number due to insufficient pressing operation (long pressing) of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period. Even so, according to the end of the operation effective period (elapse of the operation effective time), the value of the effect stage counter is forcibly increased to the number of pre-selected final lightings, and the increased effect stage counter It changes to the production content corresponding to the value of.
Similarly, in the button notice effect executed when the “super reach change effect” is executed during the change effect, the effect of pressing the effect button 5b during the operation effective period is insufficient. Even when the value of the stage counter does not reach the predetermined maximum value, the value of the stage stage counter is forcibly set according to the end of the operation effective period (elapse of the operation effective time). And the content changes to the production content corresponding to the value of the production stage counter after the increase.
However, in each operation device effect, the value of the effect stage counter reaches a predetermined maximum value (or a pre-selected final lighting number) due to insufficient pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period. Even if it is not, the configuration may be such that the value of the effect stage counter is not forcibly increased to a predetermined maximum value at the end of the operation effective period (elapse of the operation effective time). In such a configuration, at the end of the operation effective period (when the operation effective time elapses), the effect content corresponding to the value of the effect counter at that time is executed (maintained).
Alternatively, the plurality of operation device effects may include both an operation device effect in which the forcible processing is executed and an operation device effect in which the forcible processing is not executed.
In the operation device effect in which the forcible process is executed, the value of the effect stage counter is set to a predetermined maximum value (or the last selected in advance) due to insufficient pressing of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period. If the number of lighting is not reached, the value of the stage counter is forcibly increased to a predetermined maximum value at the end of the operation effective period (elapse of the operation effective time), and the stage counter after the increase is increased. It changes to the production contents corresponding to the value of.
On the other hand, in the operation device effect in which the forced process is not executed, the value of the effect stage counter is set to a predetermined maximum value (or a preselected final lighting) due to insufficient pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period. When the operation effective period ends (when the operation effective time elapses), the content of the effect corresponding to the value of the effect counter at that time is executed (maintained).
For example, the short-time continuation judgment effect is an operation device effect in which forcible processing is executed, and the chance-up effect and the button notice effect are in operation device effects in which the forcible processing is not executed. In such a configuration, among the button scenarios corresponding to the chance-up effect and the button notice effect, a button scenario (specifically, “button scenario B10”) for verifying whether the forcible process is appropriately executed. And “button scenario C10”) are replaced with other button scenarios.

(Modification 4)
In the above embodiment, the number of button scenarios that can be selected during the game (hereinafter referred to as “button scenario during game”) is the same (specifically, for the short-time continuous judgment effect, the chance-up effect, and the button notice effect) There are 8).
That is, in the short-time continuous judgment production, “button scenario A1” to “button scenario A8” are defined as the button scenario during the game, and in the chance up production, “button scenario B1” to “button scenario B8” as the button scenario during the game. In the button notice effect, “button scenario C1” to “button scenario C8” are defined as button scenarios during the game.
However, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of in-game button scenarios is different for the short-time continuous judgment effect, the chance-up effect, and the button notice effect. However, even in the case of such a configuration, the total number of button scenarios is the same for the short-time continuous judgment effect, the chance-up effect, and the button notice effect.
At this time, the number of in-game button scenarios corresponding to each operation device effect may be defined according to the selection probability (appearance probability) of the operation device effect.
For example, when the selection probability of the button notice effect is higher than the selection probability of the chance notice effect, the number of in-game button scenarios corresponding to the button notice effect is changed to More than the number.

1 Pachinko machine 5b Production button 31a Display screen 200 Main control circuit 300 Production control circuit T Operation effective elapsed time

Claims (3)

In response to the operation means being operated during the setting of the valid period corresponding to the specific effect, the mode of the operation effect is selected based on the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the specific effect, and the selected mode is selected. Including an effect control means for executing an operation effect according to
The storage area corresponding to the specific performance includes an effective area and an invalid area,
The effect control means selects a mode of operation effect based on information stored in the effective area. The effective area includes a plurality of storage units,
The effect control unit selects an operation effect mode based on information stored in the storage unit according to the time when the operation unit is operated during the setting of the effective period among the plurality of storage units. The gaming machine according to claim 1. As the specific effect, including the first specific effect and the second specific effect,
The capacity of the storage area corresponding to the first specific effect is the same as the capacity of the storage area corresponding to the second specific effect,
The capacity of the effective area included in the storage area corresponding to the first specific effect and the capacity of the effective area included in the storage area corresponding to the second specific effect are different from each other. Gaming machine.

Images